handbook for dissertationcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/handbookfordissertation.… ·...

22
Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel. +39 06 377251 Fax: +39 06 37725214 www.unimarconi.it / www.marconichannel.tv / www.marconistudios.it [email protected] Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA: 07154361005 HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATION In a quick view: Dear Students It is time to start preparing you Dissertation! Your dissertation is an opportunity for you to demonstrate your ability to investigate an issue of your own choice over a significant period of time. Essentially this is an individual effort but it is carried out with the guidance and advice of your supervisor. Research is a creative and investigative process which only you can develop fully. The role of the supervisor is to act as a learning resource for the student. It is the student's responsibility to make use of that opportunity, in consultation with the supervisor. The student is therefore expected to accept responsibility for the management of his/her learning. Following the allocation of a supervisor, the student should contact the supervisor to arrange a meeting. The supervisor will assist in: 1. clarifying the terms of the research; 2. suggesting areas of reading; 3. reviewing the proposed methodology; 4. establishing a timetable for the research which also includes initial dates for further meetings between the student and supervisor; 5. advising the student about appropriate standards and conventions concerning the assessment; 6. Providing means of contact in addition to tutorials It is the student's responsibility to arrange the initial meeting with the supervisor. The student should bring a copy of their dissertation proposal. The supervisor and student should then make mutually beneficial arrangements to provide support and supervision. The student reasonably expect to obtain some tutorial guidance from their supervisor. The supervisor will keep a record of the coverage and outcomes of each meeting, and the progress expected by the next meeting. The student can also expect the supervisor to comment on draft work submitted through the dissertation process. Students should inform the Postgraduate Office or the Tutor of the Greek cohort for their choice of supervisor. Please note that the consent of the supervisor is essential, so please inform him/her for your research and intention. FORMAT, STRUCTURE AND ACADEMIC CONTENT You will need to use your discretion in handling various aspects of your investigation. Nevertheless, in presenting your work it is important that you process and order information sequentially. The following list highlights the essential parts which your completed work should contain: 1. Front Cover (& Spine) 2. Title Page 3. Acknowledgments 4. Contents Page(Contents, List of Tables, Figures and Appendices) 5. Abstract/Executive Summary 6. Introduction Aim and Objectives 7. Literature Review 8. Methodology

Upload: others

Post on 22-Aug-2020

1 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATION In a quick view Dear Students It is time to start preparing you Dissertation Your dissertation is an opportunity for you to demonstrate your ability to investigate an issue of your own choice over a significant period of time Essentially this is an individual effort but it is carried out with the guidance and advice of your supervisor Research is a creative and investigative process which only you can develop fully The role of the supervisor is to act as a learning resource for the student It is the students responsibility to make use of that opportunity in consultation with the supervisor The student is therefore expected to accept responsibility for the management of hisher learning Following the allocation of a supervisor the student should contact the supervisor to arrange a meeting The supervisor will assist in 1 clarifying the terms of the research

2 suggesting areas of reading

3 reviewing the proposed methodology

4 establishing a timetable for the research which also includes initial dates for further meetings between the student and supervisor

5 advising the student about appropriate standards and conventions concerning the assessment

6 Providing means of contact in addition to tutorials It is the students responsibility to arrange the initial meeting with the supervisor The student should bring a copy of their dissertation proposal The supervisor and student should then make mutually beneficial arrangements to provide support and supervision The student reasonably expect to obtain some tutorial guidance from their supervisor The supervisor will keep a record of the coverage and outcomes of each meeting and the progress expected by the next meeting The student can also expect the supervisor to comment on draft work submitted through the dissertation process Students should inform the Postgraduate Office or the Tutor of the Greek cohort for their choice of supervisor Please note that the consent of the supervisor is essential so please inform himher for your research and intention

FORMAT STRUCTURE AND ACADEMIC CONTENT You will need to use your discretion in handling various aspects of your investigation Nevertheless in presenting your work it is important that you process and order information sequentially The following list highlights the essential parts which your completed work should contain

1 Front Cover (amp Spine)

2 Title Page

3 Acknowledgments

4 Contents Page(Contents List of Tables Figures and Appendices)

5 AbstractExecutive Summary

6 Introduction Aim and Objectives

7 Literature Review

8 Methodology

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

9 Investigation Results

10 Investigation Analysis

11 Conclusion (with suggestions for further work)

12 Recommendations (if appropriate)

13 References Bibliography

14 Appendices (see Section Four

FRONT COVER amp SPINE

The FRONT COVER should contain a) the title of the study succinctly expressed and concisely worded (maximum of 12 words)

b) the name of the author

c) the award (course)

d) the year of submission in the following order

The COVER SPINE should be presented as follows

THE EFFECTS OF FINANCIAL CRISIS ON MONETARY POLICY

GEORGE PAPAS

MA ECONOMICS

2014

GEORGE PAPAS MA ECONOMICS 2014

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

TITLE PAGE a) The TITLE PAGE should contain

b) the full title of the study

c) the full name of the author

d) the qualification to which the project relates using a standard form of words

e) the institutions name

f) the month and year of submission in the following order

THE EFFECTS OF FINANCIAL CRISIS ON MONETARY POLICY

GEORGE PAPAS

A dissertation submitted in partial fulfilment of the requirements of MARCONI University for the degree of MA Economics

MARCONI UNIVERSITY JUNE 2014

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

DISSERTATION OR PROJECT 1 Registration You register for your Masters Dissertation or Project in the same way as for your other modules Once you are registered for your dissertationproject you are expected to submit it in the period for which you are registered The Universityrsquos standard assessment arrangements and mitigating circumstances procedures apply

2 Supervision Arrangements Students receive individual supervision on their dissertation The assigned supervision is the outcome of discussions between the student and the dissertation supervisor The supervisor is confirmed by the start of the semester in which the student registers for the dissertation Once the supervisor is confirmed the students and supervisor discuss the schedule of work and supervision (meetings and guidance)

3 Topic approval Students are free to choose a topic and issue of interest to them which relates to any part any area in the programme of study Students are encouraged to undertake research which may include the use of mathematical statistical andor IT skills In order to assist students further additional peer support is provided through the dissertation period

4 Planning and Timing The work to be undertaken on any dissertation will depend on the choice of topic The student and supervisor will at the start of the dissertation discuss the context of the project in detail The proposal which is handed in within four weeks should show the timing of each individual component Students must communicate with the supervisor at regular intervals to discuss a draft copy of the individual pieces of work as they are completed Also the supervisor must see a draft copy of the completed dissertation at least two weeks before the final submission date to give comments on the completed work Students work independently on their research consulting the supervisor as discussed The smooth running of the research and supervision is ensured with submission of the proposal which includes a

lsquowork and supervision schedulersquo at the start of the dissertation 5 FEEDBACK It is the remit of supervisors to provide good quality support by ensuring prompt email response In terms of feedback supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter and seven to ten days for a full dissertation draft It is not possible for a supervisor to read a full dissertation and provide constructive and detailed information three days before the deadline of the final dissertation Acknowledgments by supervisors of emails received should be apparent within 48 hours

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Students may need to give supervisors a minimum of ten days to read and comment on their work supervisors should be able to give constructive written feedback via email with time for the student to undertake any changes before the final submission date The dates and timetables can be set up during the initial meeting We recommend that this information is emailed by the supervisor as a means of having written records to support their work agreements (see Appendix 1)

6 ETHICS AND PLAGIARISM Students are expected to familiarise themselves with the ethical implications of their proposed research and ensure all aspects of their research are conducted in an ethical manner Students are expected to familiarise themselves with the rules regarding plagiarism and in submitting their dissertation students are acknowledging that the submission is entirely hisher own work Students are required to produce dissertations that are their own work and all material taken from other sources must be cited using the Harvard Referencing system If plagiarism is detected harsh penalties will be imposed

7 Submission Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via platform and one directly to the supervisor via

email No hard copy submissions are required or accepted

There are four standard deadline dates for submission in every academic year The dates for 201314 are Deadline Winter Semester January 2014 Spring Semester May 2014 Summer Period August 2014 Autumn Period November 2014

DISSERTATION SUBMISSION INFORMATION

Draft Dissertation (for formative feedback) Students are encouraged to meet fortnightly with their supervisors throughout the module and to maintain an effective communication and feedback flow to allow students to progress through the stages of their dissertation production Students will be expected to have produced a substantial draft upon which comprehensive formative feedback from their supervisor can be generated to ensure timely inclusion in the final submission Students should submit drafts of Chapters 2 3 and 4 for formative feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Final Dissertation The student will be assessed on their final submitted dissertation of 10000-12000 words Students can work into two different directions or even both namely an empirical study using primary or secondary data a literature review with a critical analysis and an extended case study based on theoretical aspects of the theory delivered in lectures The hereunder structure is indicative for a combination of a literature review with empirical results The format and the type of the submitted work is the result of a mutual agreement between the supervisor and the student

Final dissertation structure

SECTIONWORD COUNT

WEIGHTING

DETAILS

INTITAL PAGES

Not included in word count

Title page (inc your name date of submission course title of dissertation)

DedicationsAcknowledgmentsForeword

List of ChartsTables

List of Abbreviations

Table of Contents

Abstract This is a very brief section at the beginning of the dissertation which gives the reader an overview of the contents of the dissertation It includes Brief description of the research problem Methods used Findings obtained Conclusion and implications (Approx 500 words)

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

Approx 1000 words

This chapter should reflect the scope of the research outlining the size

of the problem the rationale behind pursuing such an investigation and

any personal motivations prompting the investigation It is imperative

that the chapter includes clearly stated aims which lead to a well-

formulated research question which is then interpreted through a brief

selection of objectives The objective of the chapter is to introduce the

reader to the work as much as give them an impression what to expect

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

CHAPTER 2 LITERATURE REVIEW

Approx 4000 words

This chapter should be a reworked and modified submission that

students have developed in the preceding semester while undertaking

their pathway core module Students are expected to re-draft the

chapter to ensure that it fits in the context of the whole dissertation and

is no longer a stand-alone piece

The chapter describes and defines the context of the dissertation The

chapter needs to define and explain the intended meaning behind the

research question It should be focused and explore the relationships

between concepts noted in the research question as well as

demonstrate critical thinking drawn from the academic sources relevant

to the research question

The objective of the chapter is to allow reader to recognise the broader

frameworks supporting the undertaken research and the wider linkages

that exist beyond the scope of the research whilst engaging with ways

these debates impact the undertaken research

CHAPTER 3 PROCESS OF RESEARCH

Approx 1500 words

This chapter provides an overview of how the research was conducted

Although there is some expectation of a more descriptive approach

(simply describing the process of data collection) for the most part

students are expected to reflect upon the appropriateness of the steps

they took to their given research question Thus the tone of the chapter

should be more reflective and focused on examining the

appropriateness of the undertaken process and the supporting

methodology It is imperative that any methodological choices and

decisions are argued against the overall research question to

demonstrate the rigour of the process During the research process

secondary data is essential and primary data is desirable

Students should cover for example

the types of decisions they had made in order to respond to their research question and the impact of those decisions on shaping the investigation

the rationale behind the choice of research methods

what data is appropriate and how was it sourced

what were obstacles and how they were overcome

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

how reliability and validity have been ensured

what were the limitations of the data collection The above points are to be used as a guiding framework and by all

means are not seen as exhaustive

The objective of the chapter is to clearly stipulate the process supporting

the given research question and give the reader a clear indication

whether the research has been undertaken with academic rigour

CHAPTER 4 PRESENTATION OF FINDINGS

Approx 3000 words

The chapter acts as a showcase of the submission It places the research

question at its centre and methodically presents a response to it It is

here that students describe what they have found out what data sets

have given particular insights and how those insights illuminate the

research question It is imperative that the content of the chapter is not

seen as simple description of the collected data but rather a narrative is

presented that offers data analysis and critical interrogation in light of

the research question Part of the analysis should also include

recognition of the underpinning literature review which would further

the analysis process In short students should briefly present the data

focus on conducting a thorough analysis of it and presentexplain the

outcomes of said analysis in the critical context of their literature review

The objective of the chapter is to provide the reader with a critical

narrative that respond to the research question where the focus is not

just on what has been discovered but also why any of that information

is meaning full to the undertaken study

CHAPTER 5 CONCLUSION AND

RECOMMENDATIONS

Approx 2000 words

This culminating chapter returns to the initial presented aims research

question and objectives and provides an overall response to them as

derived from the previous chapters The chapter should offer concluding

remarks not only in response to the research question but also highlights

the gained insights The chapter should also provide recommendation in

response to the research question either in terms of specific actions or

further research It is imperative that the chapter clearly stems from the

preceding chapters and does not stand on its own

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

REFERENCES

(Not included in the word count)

This part of the dissertation lists what research sources were used across the whole submission apart from the actual collected data The data sources would be listed in chapter 3 and evidenced in appendices

All books articles sources of statistical data and web sites used in the

dissertation must be listed in this chapter Additional sources consulted

should also be placed in this section

Entries must be formatted using the Harvard Referencing system (see

Appendix 2)

APPENDICES

(Not included in the word count)

All quantitative working (eg screen prints from SPSS) organograms

organisation policies and procedures letters of

authorisationconfidentiality agreements progress reportsmeeting

notesother relevant communications sample observationfield notes

any visual records of data etc

To qualify for inclusion in the Appendices material should be referred to

somewhere within the body of the dissertation Eg Example of

instrument for primary data collection eg base questionnaire

structured interview pro-forma Also one example of respondent

feedback eg completed questionnaire transcript of interview (can be

coded for confidentiality although supervisor should be aware of

source)

FORMATTINGGENERAL a Headers (containing short title of dissertation) and Footers (containing Student

Name Module Code and Page Numbering) are required b Text alignment should be fully justified (ie in a block with no ragged right margin) c All spacing between paragraphs should be consistent d Type font Times RomanCourierArial size 12 e All headings should be Bold f Accurate Harvard Referencing must be used throughout (see Skills Handbook for

info) g Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via BlackBoard No hard copy

submissions are required or accepted

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 1

Supervisorrsquos feedback and Student support sheet

Support Sheet for NAME OF STUDENT__________________________________ Areas for development and support

Yes

Abstract and Introduction Does the student still need support with writing the abstract

Clarity Logic Critical

Literature Review Does the student still need support with referencing

Literature Review Does the literature review need to separate description from critical review

Methodology Would the student benefit for additional tutorials on (tick those that apply)

Justification of the design adopted Sampling Data Collection instruments Pre-testing ModelsConcepts employed Reflexive approach Ethical Issues Limitations Feasibility Replicability Interviews Quantitative collection

Others (please specify)

Findings Would it be useful for the student to do a tutorial on presenting findingscomparison Or addressing the meaning of results Analysis Is it recommended that support is offered in identifying

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

description from connecting and substantiating arguments when analysing research data

Other Issues If you believe that in addition to the tutorials and supervision the student could benefit from an additional tutorial to refresh on a particular area please let us know If supervision and tutorials have been sufficient for the needs of the studentrsquos research and dissertation return the form to indicate you have carried out the feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 2

The Harvard Referencing System In-text references

For citations inside the text all we need is just the authorrsquos surname and the year his work was published When we quote the exact words from a work we also add the page numbers in which the quotation appears in our source Watch the following variations

INDIRECT QUOTATIONS (PARAPHRASING SUMMARISING) When we present details from a source in our own words (paraphrasing or summarising) then our quotations are called indirect quotations The way we present them in the text is the following When we donrsquot use the authorrsquos name inside the text we place both the name and the year in a parenthesis

While information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements (Dacey 2002)

When we place the authorrsquos name inside the text we put the year of publication in the parenthesis immediately after the surname

As Dacey (2002) writes although information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements

If the source is written by two authors

Earlier (Vroom and Jago 1988) we described a systematic evaluation Vroom and Yetton (1973) studied this potential limitation

If the authors of one work are more than two we use only the surname of the first author mentioned and then the abbreviation et al (et alia Latin ldquoand othersrdquo)

the ability to respond intuitively and often very rapidly (Bar-Tel et al 1999) ishellip Crossan et al (1999) stress that the subconscious is critical to understanding how people come to

If we cite more than two authors in a sentence

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Several decades later participation became a key ingredient of several management theories including those of Likert (1967) Maier (1970) and Hersey and Blanchard (1982)

Note that when we place information inside the parenthesis we use a semi-colon to separate one source from the other

Although much recent research has focused on the importance of long-term strategic relationships (Morgan and Hunt 1994 Wilson 1995) hellip

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is expanding at a rapid rate and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiations (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999) as well as frameworks unique to a specific culture (Fang 1997 Faure 1998 Kumar 1999)

If the author has published two or more works in the same year we distinguish between them by adding the letters a b c etc closed up to the year of publication to indicate the order in which they were published

Such is the scale of improvement within less than a year (Burt 2000a)

If we need to refer to two works by the same author published in the same year

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000a b)

If our source is trustworthy but the authorrsquos name is not known we use the name of the source in the text

More people than ever seem to be using retail home delivery (The Times 1996) in order to unlock greater growth and competitiveness (European Commission 1998) so that local organizations can help new and growing businesses (DTI 2002)

Note that when the name of the source is too long and we use initials in the text then we should not forget to provide the full name at the end of our assignment in the reference list bibliography (eg DTI Department of Trade and Industry) If our source is from the internet we follow the same principle

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 2: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

9 Investigation Results

10 Investigation Analysis

11 Conclusion (with suggestions for further work)

12 Recommendations (if appropriate)

13 References Bibliography

14 Appendices (see Section Four

FRONT COVER amp SPINE

The FRONT COVER should contain a) the title of the study succinctly expressed and concisely worded (maximum of 12 words)

b) the name of the author

c) the award (course)

d) the year of submission in the following order

The COVER SPINE should be presented as follows

THE EFFECTS OF FINANCIAL CRISIS ON MONETARY POLICY

GEORGE PAPAS

MA ECONOMICS

2014

GEORGE PAPAS MA ECONOMICS 2014

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

TITLE PAGE a) The TITLE PAGE should contain

b) the full title of the study

c) the full name of the author

d) the qualification to which the project relates using a standard form of words

e) the institutions name

f) the month and year of submission in the following order

THE EFFECTS OF FINANCIAL CRISIS ON MONETARY POLICY

GEORGE PAPAS

A dissertation submitted in partial fulfilment of the requirements of MARCONI University for the degree of MA Economics

MARCONI UNIVERSITY JUNE 2014

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

DISSERTATION OR PROJECT 1 Registration You register for your Masters Dissertation or Project in the same way as for your other modules Once you are registered for your dissertationproject you are expected to submit it in the period for which you are registered The Universityrsquos standard assessment arrangements and mitigating circumstances procedures apply

2 Supervision Arrangements Students receive individual supervision on their dissertation The assigned supervision is the outcome of discussions between the student and the dissertation supervisor The supervisor is confirmed by the start of the semester in which the student registers for the dissertation Once the supervisor is confirmed the students and supervisor discuss the schedule of work and supervision (meetings and guidance)

3 Topic approval Students are free to choose a topic and issue of interest to them which relates to any part any area in the programme of study Students are encouraged to undertake research which may include the use of mathematical statistical andor IT skills In order to assist students further additional peer support is provided through the dissertation period

4 Planning and Timing The work to be undertaken on any dissertation will depend on the choice of topic The student and supervisor will at the start of the dissertation discuss the context of the project in detail The proposal which is handed in within four weeks should show the timing of each individual component Students must communicate with the supervisor at regular intervals to discuss a draft copy of the individual pieces of work as they are completed Also the supervisor must see a draft copy of the completed dissertation at least two weeks before the final submission date to give comments on the completed work Students work independently on their research consulting the supervisor as discussed The smooth running of the research and supervision is ensured with submission of the proposal which includes a

lsquowork and supervision schedulersquo at the start of the dissertation 5 FEEDBACK It is the remit of supervisors to provide good quality support by ensuring prompt email response In terms of feedback supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter and seven to ten days for a full dissertation draft It is not possible for a supervisor to read a full dissertation and provide constructive and detailed information three days before the deadline of the final dissertation Acknowledgments by supervisors of emails received should be apparent within 48 hours

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Students may need to give supervisors a minimum of ten days to read and comment on their work supervisors should be able to give constructive written feedback via email with time for the student to undertake any changes before the final submission date The dates and timetables can be set up during the initial meeting We recommend that this information is emailed by the supervisor as a means of having written records to support their work agreements (see Appendix 1)

6 ETHICS AND PLAGIARISM Students are expected to familiarise themselves with the ethical implications of their proposed research and ensure all aspects of their research are conducted in an ethical manner Students are expected to familiarise themselves with the rules regarding plagiarism and in submitting their dissertation students are acknowledging that the submission is entirely hisher own work Students are required to produce dissertations that are their own work and all material taken from other sources must be cited using the Harvard Referencing system If plagiarism is detected harsh penalties will be imposed

7 Submission Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via platform and one directly to the supervisor via

email No hard copy submissions are required or accepted

There are four standard deadline dates for submission in every academic year The dates for 201314 are Deadline Winter Semester January 2014 Spring Semester May 2014 Summer Period August 2014 Autumn Period November 2014

DISSERTATION SUBMISSION INFORMATION

Draft Dissertation (for formative feedback) Students are encouraged to meet fortnightly with their supervisors throughout the module and to maintain an effective communication and feedback flow to allow students to progress through the stages of their dissertation production Students will be expected to have produced a substantial draft upon which comprehensive formative feedback from their supervisor can be generated to ensure timely inclusion in the final submission Students should submit drafts of Chapters 2 3 and 4 for formative feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Final Dissertation The student will be assessed on their final submitted dissertation of 10000-12000 words Students can work into two different directions or even both namely an empirical study using primary or secondary data a literature review with a critical analysis and an extended case study based on theoretical aspects of the theory delivered in lectures The hereunder structure is indicative for a combination of a literature review with empirical results The format and the type of the submitted work is the result of a mutual agreement between the supervisor and the student

Final dissertation structure

SECTIONWORD COUNT

WEIGHTING

DETAILS

INTITAL PAGES

Not included in word count

Title page (inc your name date of submission course title of dissertation)

DedicationsAcknowledgmentsForeword

List of ChartsTables

List of Abbreviations

Table of Contents

Abstract This is a very brief section at the beginning of the dissertation which gives the reader an overview of the contents of the dissertation It includes Brief description of the research problem Methods used Findings obtained Conclusion and implications (Approx 500 words)

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

Approx 1000 words

This chapter should reflect the scope of the research outlining the size

of the problem the rationale behind pursuing such an investigation and

any personal motivations prompting the investigation It is imperative

that the chapter includes clearly stated aims which lead to a well-

formulated research question which is then interpreted through a brief

selection of objectives The objective of the chapter is to introduce the

reader to the work as much as give them an impression what to expect

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

CHAPTER 2 LITERATURE REVIEW

Approx 4000 words

This chapter should be a reworked and modified submission that

students have developed in the preceding semester while undertaking

their pathway core module Students are expected to re-draft the

chapter to ensure that it fits in the context of the whole dissertation and

is no longer a stand-alone piece

The chapter describes and defines the context of the dissertation The

chapter needs to define and explain the intended meaning behind the

research question It should be focused and explore the relationships

between concepts noted in the research question as well as

demonstrate critical thinking drawn from the academic sources relevant

to the research question

The objective of the chapter is to allow reader to recognise the broader

frameworks supporting the undertaken research and the wider linkages

that exist beyond the scope of the research whilst engaging with ways

these debates impact the undertaken research

CHAPTER 3 PROCESS OF RESEARCH

Approx 1500 words

This chapter provides an overview of how the research was conducted

Although there is some expectation of a more descriptive approach

(simply describing the process of data collection) for the most part

students are expected to reflect upon the appropriateness of the steps

they took to their given research question Thus the tone of the chapter

should be more reflective and focused on examining the

appropriateness of the undertaken process and the supporting

methodology It is imperative that any methodological choices and

decisions are argued against the overall research question to

demonstrate the rigour of the process During the research process

secondary data is essential and primary data is desirable

Students should cover for example

the types of decisions they had made in order to respond to their research question and the impact of those decisions on shaping the investigation

the rationale behind the choice of research methods

what data is appropriate and how was it sourced

what were obstacles and how they were overcome

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

how reliability and validity have been ensured

what were the limitations of the data collection The above points are to be used as a guiding framework and by all

means are not seen as exhaustive

The objective of the chapter is to clearly stipulate the process supporting

the given research question and give the reader a clear indication

whether the research has been undertaken with academic rigour

CHAPTER 4 PRESENTATION OF FINDINGS

Approx 3000 words

The chapter acts as a showcase of the submission It places the research

question at its centre and methodically presents a response to it It is

here that students describe what they have found out what data sets

have given particular insights and how those insights illuminate the

research question It is imperative that the content of the chapter is not

seen as simple description of the collected data but rather a narrative is

presented that offers data analysis and critical interrogation in light of

the research question Part of the analysis should also include

recognition of the underpinning literature review which would further

the analysis process In short students should briefly present the data

focus on conducting a thorough analysis of it and presentexplain the

outcomes of said analysis in the critical context of their literature review

The objective of the chapter is to provide the reader with a critical

narrative that respond to the research question where the focus is not

just on what has been discovered but also why any of that information

is meaning full to the undertaken study

CHAPTER 5 CONCLUSION AND

RECOMMENDATIONS

Approx 2000 words

This culminating chapter returns to the initial presented aims research

question and objectives and provides an overall response to them as

derived from the previous chapters The chapter should offer concluding

remarks not only in response to the research question but also highlights

the gained insights The chapter should also provide recommendation in

response to the research question either in terms of specific actions or

further research It is imperative that the chapter clearly stems from the

preceding chapters and does not stand on its own

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

REFERENCES

(Not included in the word count)

This part of the dissertation lists what research sources were used across the whole submission apart from the actual collected data The data sources would be listed in chapter 3 and evidenced in appendices

All books articles sources of statistical data and web sites used in the

dissertation must be listed in this chapter Additional sources consulted

should also be placed in this section

Entries must be formatted using the Harvard Referencing system (see

Appendix 2)

APPENDICES

(Not included in the word count)

All quantitative working (eg screen prints from SPSS) organograms

organisation policies and procedures letters of

authorisationconfidentiality agreements progress reportsmeeting

notesother relevant communications sample observationfield notes

any visual records of data etc

To qualify for inclusion in the Appendices material should be referred to

somewhere within the body of the dissertation Eg Example of

instrument for primary data collection eg base questionnaire

structured interview pro-forma Also one example of respondent

feedback eg completed questionnaire transcript of interview (can be

coded for confidentiality although supervisor should be aware of

source)

FORMATTINGGENERAL a Headers (containing short title of dissertation) and Footers (containing Student

Name Module Code and Page Numbering) are required b Text alignment should be fully justified (ie in a block with no ragged right margin) c All spacing between paragraphs should be consistent d Type font Times RomanCourierArial size 12 e All headings should be Bold f Accurate Harvard Referencing must be used throughout (see Skills Handbook for

info) g Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via BlackBoard No hard copy

submissions are required or accepted

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 1

Supervisorrsquos feedback and Student support sheet

Support Sheet for NAME OF STUDENT__________________________________ Areas for development and support

Yes

Abstract and Introduction Does the student still need support with writing the abstract

Clarity Logic Critical

Literature Review Does the student still need support with referencing

Literature Review Does the literature review need to separate description from critical review

Methodology Would the student benefit for additional tutorials on (tick those that apply)

Justification of the design adopted Sampling Data Collection instruments Pre-testing ModelsConcepts employed Reflexive approach Ethical Issues Limitations Feasibility Replicability Interviews Quantitative collection

Others (please specify)

Findings Would it be useful for the student to do a tutorial on presenting findingscomparison Or addressing the meaning of results Analysis Is it recommended that support is offered in identifying

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

description from connecting and substantiating arguments when analysing research data

Other Issues If you believe that in addition to the tutorials and supervision the student could benefit from an additional tutorial to refresh on a particular area please let us know If supervision and tutorials have been sufficient for the needs of the studentrsquos research and dissertation return the form to indicate you have carried out the feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 2

The Harvard Referencing System In-text references

For citations inside the text all we need is just the authorrsquos surname and the year his work was published When we quote the exact words from a work we also add the page numbers in which the quotation appears in our source Watch the following variations

INDIRECT QUOTATIONS (PARAPHRASING SUMMARISING) When we present details from a source in our own words (paraphrasing or summarising) then our quotations are called indirect quotations The way we present them in the text is the following When we donrsquot use the authorrsquos name inside the text we place both the name and the year in a parenthesis

While information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements (Dacey 2002)

When we place the authorrsquos name inside the text we put the year of publication in the parenthesis immediately after the surname

As Dacey (2002) writes although information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements

If the source is written by two authors

Earlier (Vroom and Jago 1988) we described a systematic evaluation Vroom and Yetton (1973) studied this potential limitation

If the authors of one work are more than two we use only the surname of the first author mentioned and then the abbreviation et al (et alia Latin ldquoand othersrdquo)

the ability to respond intuitively and often very rapidly (Bar-Tel et al 1999) ishellip Crossan et al (1999) stress that the subconscious is critical to understanding how people come to

If we cite more than two authors in a sentence

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Several decades later participation became a key ingredient of several management theories including those of Likert (1967) Maier (1970) and Hersey and Blanchard (1982)

Note that when we place information inside the parenthesis we use a semi-colon to separate one source from the other

Although much recent research has focused on the importance of long-term strategic relationships (Morgan and Hunt 1994 Wilson 1995) hellip

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is expanding at a rapid rate and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiations (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999) as well as frameworks unique to a specific culture (Fang 1997 Faure 1998 Kumar 1999)

If the author has published two or more works in the same year we distinguish between them by adding the letters a b c etc closed up to the year of publication to indicate the order in which they were published

Such is the scale of improvement within less than a year (Burt 2000a)

If we need to refer to two works by the same author published in the same year

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000a b)

If our source is trustworthy but the authorrsquos name is not known we use the name of the source in the text

More people than ever seem to be using retail home delivery (The Times 1996) in order to unlock greater growth and competitiveness (European Commission 1998) so that local organizations can help new and growing businesses (DTI 2002)

Note that when the name of the source is too long and we use initials in the text then we should not forget to provide the full name at the end of our assignment in the reference list bibliography (eg DTI Department of Trade and Industry) If our source is from the internet we follow the same principle

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 3: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

TITLE PAGE a) The TITLE PAGE should contain

b) the full title of the study

c) the full name of the author

d) the qualification to which the project relates using a standard form of words

e) the institutions name

f) the month and year of submission in the following order

THE EFFECTS OF FINANCIAL CRISIS ON MONETARY POLICY

GEORGE PAPAS

A dissertation submitted in partial fulfilment of the requirements of MARCONI University for the degree of MA Economics

MARCONI UNIVERSITY JUNE 2014

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

DISSERTATION OR PROJECT 1 Registration You register for your Masters Dissertation or Project in the same way as for your other modules Once you are registered for your dissertationproject you are expected to submit it in the period for which you are registered The Universityrsquos standard assessment arrangements and mitigating circumstances procedures apply

2 Supervision Arrangements Students receive individual supervision on their dissertation The assigned supervision is the outcome of discussions between the student and the dissertation supervisor The supervisor is confirmed by the start of the semester in which the student registers for the dissertation Once the supervisor is confirmed the students and supervisor discuss the schedule of work and supervision (meetings and guidance)

3 Topic approval Students are free to choose a topic and issue of interest to them which relates to any part any area in the programme of study Students are encouraged to undertake research which may include the use of mathematical statistical andor IT skills In order to assist students further additional peer support is provided through the dissertation period

4 Planning and Timing The work to be undertaken on any dissertation will depend on the choice of topic The student and supervisor will at the start of the dissertation discuss the context of the project in detail The proposal which is handed in within four weeks should show the timing of each individual component Students must communicate with the supervisor at regular intervals to discuss a draft copy of the individual pieces of work as they are completed Also the supervisor must see a draft copy of the completed dissertation at least two weeks before the final submission date to give comments on the completed work Students work independently on their research consulting the supervisor as discussed The smooth running of the research and supervision is ensured with submission of the proposal which includes a

lsquowork and supervision schedulersquo at the start of the dissertation 5 FEEDBACK It is the remit of supervisors to provide good quality support by ensuring prompt email response In terms of feedback supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter and seven to ten days for a full dissertation draft It is not possible for a supervisor to read a full dissertation and provide constructive and detailed information three days before the deadline of the final dissertation Acknowledgments by supervisors of emails received should be apparent within 48 hours

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Students may need to give supervisors a minimum of ten days to read and comment on their work supervisors should be able to give constructive written feedback via email with time for the student to undertake any changes before the final submission date The dates and timetables can be set up during the initial meeting We recommend that this information is emailed by the supervisor as a means of having written records to support their work agreements (see Appendix 1)

6 ETHICS AND PLAGIARISM Students are expected to familiarise themselves with the ethical implications of their proposed research and ensure all aspects of their research are conducted in an ethical manner Students are expected to familiarise themselves with the rules regarding plagiarism and in submitting their dissertation students are acknowledging that the submission is entirely hisher own work Students are required to produce dissertations that are their own work and all material taken from other sources must be cited using the Harvard Referencing system If plagiarism is detected harsh penalties will be imposed

7 Submission Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via platform and one directly to the supervisor via

email No hard copy submissions are required or accepted

There are four standard deadline dates for submission in every academic year The dates for 201314 are Deadline Winter Semester January 2014 Spring Semester May 2014 Summer Period August 2014 Autumn Period November 2014

DISSERTATION SUBMISSION INFORMATION

Draft Dissertation (for formative feedback) Students are encouraged to meet fortnightly with their supervisors throughout the module and to maintain an effective communication and feedback flow to allow students to progress through the stages of their dissertation production Students will be expected to have produced a substantial draft upon which comprehensive formative feedback from their supervisor can be generated to ensure timely inclusion in the final submission Students should submit drafts of Chapters 2 3 and 4 for formative feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Final Dissertation The student will be assessed on their final submitted dissertation of 10000-12000 words Students can work into two different directions or even both namely an empirical study using primary or secondary data a literature review with a critical analysis and an extended case study based on theoretical aspects of the theory delivered in lectures The hereunder structure is indicative for a combination of a literature review with empirical results The format and the type of the submitted work is the result of a mutual agreement between the supervisor and the student

Final dissertation structure

SECTIONWORD COUNT

WEIGHTING

DETAILS

INTITAL PAGES

Not included in word count

Title page (inc your name date of submission course title of dissertation)

DedicationsAcknowledgmentsForeword

List of ChartsTables

List of Abbreviations

Table of Contents

Abstract This is a very brief section at the beginning of the dissertation which gives the reader an overview of the contents of the dissertation It includes Brief description of the research problem Methods used Findings obtained Conclusion and implications (Approx 500 words)

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

Approx 1000 words

This chapter should reflect the scope of the research outlining the size

of the problem the rationale behind pursuing such an investigation and

any personal motivations prompting the investigation It is imperative

that the chapter includes clearly stated aims which lead to a well-

formulated research question which is then interpreted through a brief

selection of objectives The objective of the chapter is to introduce the

reader to the work as much as give them an impression what to expect

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

CHAPTER 2 LITERATURE REVIEW

Approx 4000 words

This chapter should be a reworked and modified submission that

students have developed in the preceding semester while undertaking

their pathway core module Students are expected to re-draft the

chapter to ensure that it fits in the context of the whole dissertation and

is no longer a stand-alone piece

The chapter describes and defines the context of the dissertation The

chapter needs to define and explain the intended meaning behind the

research question It should be focused and explore the relationships

between concepts noted in the research question as well as

demonstrate critical thinking drawn from the academic sources relevant

to the research question

The objective of the chapter is to allow reader to recognise the broader

frameworks supporting the undertaken research and the wider linkages

that exist beyond the scope of the research whilst engaging with ways

these debates impact the undertaken research

CHAPTER 3 PROCESS OF RESEARCH

Approx 1500 words

This chapter provides an overview of how the research was conducted

Although there is some expectation of a more descriptive approach

(simply describing the process of data collection) for the most part

students are expected to reflect upon the appropriateness of the steps

they took to their given research question Thus the tone of the chapter

should be more reflective and focused on examining the

appropriateness of the undertaken process and the supporting

methodology It is imperative that any methodological choices and

decisions are argued against the overall research question to

demonstrate the rigour of the process During the research process

secondary data is essential and primary data is desirable

Students should cover for example

the types of decisions they had made in order to respond to their research question and the impact of those decisions on shaping the investigation

the rationale behind the choice of research methods

what data is appropriate and how was it sourced

what were obstacles and how they were overcome

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

how reliability and validity have been ensured

what were the limitations of the data collection The above points are to be used as a guiding framework and by all

means are not seen as exhaustive

The objective of the chapter is to clearly stipulate the process supporting

the given research question and give the reader a clear indication

whether the research has been undertaken with academic rigour

CHAPTER 4 PRESENTATION OF FINDINGS

Approx 3000 words

The chapter acts as a showcase of the submission It places the research

question at its centre and methodically presents a response to it It is

here that students describe what they have found out what data sets

have given particular insights and how those insights illuminate the

research question It is imperative that the content of the chapter is not

seen as simple description of the collected data but rather a narrative is

presented that offers data analysis and critical interrogation in light of

the research question Part of the analysis should also include

recognition of the underpinning literature review which would further

the analysis process In short students should briefly present the data

focus on conducting a thorough analysis of it and presentexplain the

outcomes of said analysis in the critical context of their literature review

The objective of the chapter is to provide the reader with a critical

narrative that respond to the research question where the focus is not

just on what has been discovered but also why any of that information

is meaning full to the undertaken study

CHAPTER 5 CONCLUSION AND

RECOMMENDATIONS

Approx 2000 words

This culminating chapter returns to the initial presented aims research

question and objectives and provides an overall response to them as

derived from the previous chapters The chapter should offer concluding

remarks not only in response to the research question but also highlights

the gained insights The chapter should also provide recommendation in

response to the research question either in terms of specific actions or

further research It is imperative that the chapter clearly stems from the

preceding chapters and does not stand on its own

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

REFERENCES

(Not included in the word count)

This part of the dissertation lists what research sources were used across the whole submission apart from the actual collected data The data sources would be listed in chapter 3 and evidenced in appendices

All books articles sources of statistical data and web sites used in the

dissertation must be listed in this chapter Additional sources consulted

should also be placed in this section

Entries must be formatted using the Harvard Referencing system (see

Appendix 2)

APPENDICES

(Not included in the word count)

All quantitative working (eg screen prints from SPSS) organograms

organisation policies and procedures letters of

authorisationconfidentiality agreements progress reportsmeeting

notesother relevant communications sample observationfield notes

any visual records of data etc

To qualify for inclusion in the Appendices material should be referred to

somewhere within the body of the dissertation Eg Example of

instrument for primary data collection eg base questionnaire

structured interview pro-forma Also one example of respondent

feedback eg completed questionnaire transcript of interview (can be

coded for confidentiality although supervisor should be aware of

source)

FORMATTINGGENERAL a Headers (containing short title of dissertation) and Footers (containing Student

Name Module Code and Page Numbering) are required b Text alignment should be fully justified (ie in a block with no ragged right margin) c All spacing between paragraphs should be consistent d Type font Times RomanCourierArial size 12 e All headings should be Bold f Accurate Harvard Referencing must be used throughout (see Skills Handbook for

info) g Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via BlackBoard No hard copy

submissions are required or accepted

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 1

Supervisorrsquos feedback and Student support sheet

Support Sheet for NAME OF STUDENT__________________________________ Areas for development and support

Yes

Abstract and Introduction Does the student still need support with writing the abstract

Clarity Logic Critical

Literature Review Does the student still need support with referencing

Literature Review Does the literature review need to separate description from critical review

Methodology Would the student benefit for additional tutorials on (tick those that apply)

Justification of the design adopted Sampling Data Collection instruments Pre-testing ModelsConcepts employed Reflexive approach Ethical Issues Limitations Feasibility Replicability Interviews Quantitative collection

Others (please specify)

Findings Would it be useful for the student to do a tutorial on presenting findingscomparison Or addressing the meaning of results Analysis Is it recommended that support is offered in identifying

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

description from connecting and substantiating arguments when analysing research data

Other Issues If you believe that in addition to the tutorials and supervision the student could benefit from an additional tutorial to refresh on a particular area please let us know If supervision and tutorials have been sufficient for the needs of the studentrsquos research and dissertation return the form to indicate you have carried out the feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 2

The Harvard Referencing System In-text references

For citations inside the text all we need is just the authorrsquos surname and the year his work was published When we quote the exact words from a work we also add the page numbers in which the quotation appears in our source Watch the following variations

INDIRECT QUOTATIONS (PARAPHRASING SUMMARISING) When we present details from a source in our own words (paraphrasing or summarising) then our quotations are called indirect quotations The way we present them in the text is the following When we donrsquot use the authorrsquos name inside the text we place both the name and the year in a parenthesis

While information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements (Dacey 2002)

When we place the authorrsquos name inside the text we put the year of publication in the parenthesis immediately after the surname

As Dacey (2002) writes although information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements

If the source is written by two authors

Earlier (Vroom and Jago 1988) we described a systematic evaluation Vroom and Yetton (1973) studied this potential limitation

If the authors of one work are more than two we use only the surname of the first author mentioned and then the abbreviation et al (et alia Latin ldquoand othersrdquo)

the ability to respond intuitively and often very rapidly (Bar-Tel et al 1999) ishellip Crossan et al (1999) stress that the subconscious is critical to understanding how people come to

If we cite more than two authors in a sentence

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Several decades later participation became a key ingredient of several management theories including those of Likert (1967) Maier (1970) and Hersey and Blanchard (1982)

Note that when we place information inside the parenthesis we use a semi-colon to separate one source from the other

Although much recent research has focused on the importance of long-term strategic relationships (Morgan and Hunt 1994 Wilson 1995) hellip

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is expanding at a rapid rate and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiations (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999) as well as frameworks unique to a specific culture (Fang 1997 Faure 1998 Kumar 1999)

If the author has published two or more works in the same year we distinguish between them by adding the letters a b c etc closed up to the year of publication to indicate the order in which they were published

Such is the scale of improvement within less than a year (Burt 2000a)

If we need to refer to two works by the same author published in the same year

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000a b)

If our source is trustworthy but the authorrsquos name is not known we use the name of the source in the text

More people than ever seem to be using retail home delivery (The Times 1996) in order to unlock greater growth and competitiveness (European Commission 1998) so that local organizations can help new and growing businesses (DTI 2002)

Note that when the name of the source is too long and we use initials in the text then we should not forget to provide the full name at the end of our assignment in the reference list bibliography (eg DTI Department of Trade and Industry) If our source is from the internet we follow the same principle

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 4: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

DISSERTATION OR PROJECT 1 Registration You register for your Masters Dissertation or Project in the same way as for your other modules Once you are registered for your dissertationproject you are expected to submit it in the period for which you are registered The Universityrsquos standard assessment arrangements and mitigating circumstances procedures apply

2 Supervision Arrangements Students receive individual supervision on their dissertation The assigned supervision is the outcome of discussions between the student and the dissertation supervisor The supervisor is confirmed by the start of the semester in which the student registers for the dissertation Once the supervisor is confirmed the students and supervisor discuss the schedule of work and supervision (meetings and guidance)

3 Topic approval Students are free to choose a topic and issue of interest to them which relates to any part any area in the programme of study Students are encouraged to undertake research which may include the use of mathematical statistical andor IT skills In order to assist students further additional peer support is provided through the dissertation period

4 Planning and Timing The work to be undertaken on any dissertation will depend on the choice of topic The student and supervisor will at the start of the dissertation discuss the context of the project in detail The proposal which is handed in within four weeks should show the timing of each individual component Students must communicate with the supervisor at regular intervals to discuss a draft copy of the individual pieces of work as they are completed Also the supervisor must see a draft copy of the completed dissertation at least two weeks before the final submission date to give comments on the completed work Students work independently on their research consulting the supervisor as discussed The smooth running of the research and supervision is ensured with submission of the proposal which includes a

lsquowork and supervision schedulersquo at the start of the dissertation 5 FEEDBACK It is the remit of supervisors to provide good quality support by ensuring prompt email response In terms of feedback supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter and seven to ten days for a full dissertation draft It is not possible for a supervisor to read a full dissertation and provide constructive and detailed information three days before the deadline of the final dissertation Acknowledgments by supervisors of emails received should be apparent within 48 hours

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Students may need to give supervisors a minimum of ten days to read and comment on their work supervisors should be able to give constructive written feedback via email with time for the student to undertake any changes before the final submission date The dates and timetables can be set up during the initial meeting We recommend that this information is emailed by the supervisor as a means of having written records to support their work agreements (see Appendix 1)

6 ETHICS AND PLAGIARISM Students are expected to familiarise themselves with the ethical implications of their proposed research and ensure all aspects of their research are conducted in an ethical manner Students are expected to familiarise themselves with the rules regarding plagiarism and in submitting their dissertation students are acknowledging that the submission is entirely hisher own work Students are required to produce dissertations that are their own work and all material taken from other sources must be cited using the Harvard Referencing system If plagiarism is detected harsh penalties will be imposed

7 Submission Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via platform and one directly to the supervisor via

email No hard copy submissions are required or accepted

There are four standard deadline dates for submission in every academic year The dates for 201314 are Deadline Winter Semester January 2014 Spring Semester May 2014 Summer Period August 2014 Autumn Period November 2014

DISSERTATION SUBMISSION INFORMATION

Draft Dissertation (for formative feedback) Students are encouraged to meet fortnightly with their supervisors throughout the module and to maintain an effective communication and feedback flow to allow students to progress through the stages of their dissertation production Students will be expected to have produced a substantial draft upon which comprehensive formative feedback from their supervisor can be generated to ensure timely inclusion in the final submission Students should submit drafts of Chapters 2 3 and 4 for formative feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Final Dissertation The student will be assessed on their final submitted dissertation of 10000-12000 words Students can work into two different directions or even both namely an empirical study using primary or secondary data a literature review with a critical analysis and an extended case study based on theoretical aspects of the theory delivered in lectures The hereunder structure is indicative for a combination of a literature review with empirical results The format and the type of the submitted work is the result of a mutual agreement between the supervisor and the student

Final dissertation structure

SECTIONWORD COUNT

WEIGHTING

DETAILS

INTITAL PAGES

Not included in word count

Title page (inc your name date of submission course title of dissertation)

DedicationsAcknowledgmentsForeword

List of ChartsTables

List of Abbreviations

Table of Contents

Abstract This is a very brief section at the beginning of the dissertation which gives the reader an overview of the contents of the dissertation It includes Brief description of the research problem Methods used Findings obtained Conclusion and implications (Approx 500 words)

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

Approx 1000 words

This chapter should reflect the scope of the research outlining the size

of the problem the rationale behind pursuing such an investigation and

any personal motivations prompting the investigation It is imperative

that the chapter includes clearly stated aims which lead to a well-

formulated research question which is then interpreted through a brief

selection of objectives The objective of the chapter is to introduce the

reader to the work as much as give them an impression what to expect

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

CHAPTER 2 LITERATURE REVIEW

Approx 4000 words

This chapter should be a reworked and modified submission that

students have developed in the preceding semester while undertaking

their pathway core module Students are expected to re-draft the

chapter to ensure that it fits in the context of the whole dissertation and

is no longer a stand-alone piece

The chapter describes and defines the context of the dissertation The

chapter needs to define and explain the intended meaning behind the

research question It should be focused and explore the relationships

between concepts noted in the research question as well as

demonstrate critical thinking drawn from the academic sources relevant

to the research question

The objective of the chapter is to allow reader to recognise the broader

frameworks supporting the undertaken research and the wider linkages

that exist beyond the scope of the research whilst engaging with ways

these debates impact the undertaken research

CHAPTER 3 PROCESS OF RESEARCH

Approx 1500 words

This chapter provides an overview of how the research was conducted

Although there is some expectation of a more descriptive approach

(simply describing the process of data collection) for the most part

students are expected to reflect upon the appropriateness of the steps

they took to their given research question Thus the tone of the chapter

should be more reflective and focused on examining the

appropriateness of the undertaken process and the supporting

methodology It is imperative that any methodological choices and

decisions are argued against the overall research question to

demonstrate the rigour of the process During the research process

secondary data is essential and primary data is desirable

Students should cover for example

the types of decisions they had made in order to respond to their research question and the impact of those decisions on shaping the investigation

the rationale behind the choice of research methods

what data is appropriate and how was it sourced

what were obstacles and how they were overcome

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

how reliability and validity have been ensured

what were the limitations of the data collection The above points are to be used as a guiding framework and by all

means are not seen as exhaustive

The objective of the chapter is to clearly stipulate the process supporting

the given research question and give the reader a clear indication

whether the research has been undertaken with academic rigour

CHAPTER 4 PRESENTATION OF FINDINGS

Approx 3000 words

The chapter acts as a showcase of the submission It places the research

question at its centre and methodically presents a response to it It is

here that students describe what they have found out what data sets

have given particular insights and how those insights illuminate the

research question It is imperative that the content of the chapter is not

seen as simple description of the collected data but rather a narrative is

presented that offers data analysis and critical interrogation in light of

the research question Part of the analysis should also include

recognition of the underpinning literature review which would further

the analysis process In short students should briefly present the data

focus on conducting a thorough analysis of it and presentexplain the

outcomes of said analysis in the critical context of their literature review

The objective of the chapter is to provide the reader with a critical

narrative that respond to the research question where the focus is not

just on what has been discovered but also why any of that information

is meaning full to the undertaken study

CHAPTER 5 CONCLUSION AND

RECOMMENDATIONS

Approx 2000 words

This culminating chapter returns to the initial presented aims research

question and objectives and provides an overall response to them as

derived from the previous chapters The chapter should offer concluding

remarks not only in response to the research question but also highlights

the gained insights The chapter should also provide recommendation in

response to the research question either in terms of specific actions or

further research It is imperative that the chapter clearly stems from the

preceding chapters and does not stand on its own

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

REFERENCES

(Not included in the word count)

This part of the dissertation lists what research sources were used across the whole submission apart from the actual collected data The data sources would be listed in chapter 3 and evidenced in appendices

All books articles sources of statistical data and web sites used in the

dissertation must be listed in this chapter Additional sources consulted

should also be placed in this section

Entries must be formatted using the Harvard Referencing system (see

Appendix 2)

APPENDICES

(Not included in the word count)

All quantitative working (eg screen prints from SPSS) organograms

organisation policies and procedures letters of

authorisationconfidentiality agreements progress reportsmeeting

notesother relevant communications sample observationfield notes

any visual records of data etc

To qualify for inclusion in the Appendices material should be referred to

somewhere within the body of the dissertation Eg Example of

instrument for primary data collection eg base questionnaire

structured interview pro-forma Also one example of respondent

feedback eg completed questionnaire transcript of interview (can be

coded for confidentiality although supervisor should be aware of

source)

FORMATTINGGENERAL a Headers (containing short title of dissertation) and Footers (containing Student

Name Module Code and Page Numbering) are required b Text alignment should be fully justified (ie in a block with no ragged right margin) c All spacing between paragraphs should be consistent d Type font Times RomanCourierArial size 12 e All headings should be Bold f Accurate Harvard Referencing must be used throughout (see Skills Handbook for

info) g Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via BlackBoard No hard copy

submissions are required or accepted

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 1

Supervisorrsquos feedback and Student support sheet

Support Sheet for NAME OF STUDENT__________________________________ Areas for development and support

Yes

Abstract and Introduction Does the student still need support with writing the abstract

Clarity Logic Critical

Literature Review Does the student still need support with referencing

Literature Review Does the literature review need to separate description from critical review

Methodology Would the student benefit for additional tutorials on (tick those that apply)

Justification of the design adopted Sampling Data Collection instruments Pre-testing ModelsConcepts employed Reflexive approach Ethical Issues Limitations Feasibility Replicability Interviews Quantitative collection

Others (please specify)

Findings Would it be useful for the student to do a tutorial on presenting findingscomparison Or addressing the meaning of results Analysis Is it recommended that support is offered in identifying

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

description from connecting and substantiating arguments when analysing research data

Other Issues If you believe that in addition to the tutorials and supervision the student could benefit from an additional tutorial to refresh on a particular area please let us know If supervision and tutorials have been sufficient for the needs of the studentrsquos research and dissertation return the form to indicate you have carried out the feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 2

The Harvard Referencing System In-text references

For citations inside the text all we need is just the authorrsquos surname and the year his work was published When we quote the exact words from a work we also add the page numbers in which the quotation appears in our source Watch the following variations

INDIRECT QUOTATIONS (PARAPHRASING SUMMARISING) When we present details from a source in our own words (paraphrasing or summarising) then our quotations are called indirect quotations The way we present them in the text is the following When we donrsquot use the authorrsquos name inside the text we place both the name and the year in a parenthesis

While information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements (Dacey 2002)

When we place the authorrsquos name inside the text we put the year of publication in the parenthesis immediately after the surname

As Dacey (2002) writes although information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements

If the source is written by two authors

Earlier (Vroom and Jago 1988) we described a systematic evaluation Vroom and Yetton (1973) studied this potential limitation

If the authors of one work are more than two we use only the surname of the first author mentioned and then the abbreviation et al (et alia Latin ldquoand othersrdquo)

the ability to respond intuitively and often very rapidly (Bar-Tel et al 1999) ishellip Crossan et al (1999) stress that the subconscious is critical to understanding how people come to

If we cite more than two authors in a sentence

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Several decades later participation became a key ingredient of several management theories including those of Likert (1967) Maier (1970) and Hersey and Blanchard (1982)

Note that when we place information inside the parenthesis we use a semi-colon to separate one source from the other

Although much recent research has focused on the importance of long-term strategic relationships (Morgan and Hunt 1994 Wilson 1995) hellip

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is expanding at a rapid rate and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiations (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999) as well as frameworks unique to a specific culture (Fang 1997 Faure 1998 Kumar 1999)

If the author has published two or more works in the same year we distinguish between them by adding the letters a b c etc closed up to the year of publication to indicate the order in which they were published

Such is the scale of improvement within less than a year (Burt 2000a)

If we need to refer to two works by the same author published in the same year

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000a b)

If our source is trustworthy but the authorrsquos name is not known we use the name of the source in the text

More people than ever seem to be using retail home delivery (The Times 1996) in order to unlock greater growth and competitiveness (European Commission 1998) so that local organizations can help new and growing businesses (DTI 2002)

Note that when the name of the source is too long and we use initials in the text then we should not forget to provide the full name at the end of our assignment in the reference list bibliography (eg DTI Department of Trade and Industry) If our source is from the internet we follow the same principle

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 5: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Students may need to give supervisors a minimum of ten days to read and comment on their work supervisors should be able to give constructive written feedback via email with time for the student to undertake any changes before the final submission date The dates and timetables can be set up during the initial meeting We recommend that this information is emailed by the supervisor as a means of having written records to support their work agreements (see Appendix 1)

6 ETHICS AND PLAGIARISM Students are expected to familiarise themselves with the ethical implications of their proposed research and ensure all aspects of their research are conducted in an ethical manner Students are expected to familiarise themselves with the rules regarding plagiarism and in submitting their dissertation students are acknowledging that the submission is entirely hisher own work Students are required to produce dissertations that are their own work and all material taken from other sources must be cited using the Harvard Referencing system If plagiarism is detected harsh penalties will be imposed

7 Submission Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via platform and one directly to the supervisor via

email No hard copy submissions are required or accepted

There are four standard deadline dates for submission in every academic year The dates for 201314 are Deadline Winter Semester January 2014 Spring Semester May 2014 Summer Period August 2014 Autumn Period November 2014

DISSERTATION SUBMISSION INFORMATION

Draft Dissertation (for formative feedback) Students are encouraged to meet fortnightly with their supervisors throughout the module and to maintain an effective communication and feedback flow to allow students to progress through the stages of their dissertation production Students will be expected to have produced a substantial draft upon which comprehensive formative feedback from their supervisor can be generated to ensure timely inclusion in the final submission Students should submit drafts of Chapters 2 3 and 4 for formative feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Final Dissertation The student will be assessed on their final submitted dissertation of 10000-12000 words Students can work into two different directions or even both namely an empirical study using primary or secondary data a literature review with a critical analysis and an extended case study based on theoretical aspects of the theory delivered in lectures The hereunder structure is indicative for a combination of a literature review with empirical results The format and the type of the submitted work is the result of a mutual agreement between the supervisor and the student

Final dissertation structure

SECTIONWORD COUNT

WEIGHTING

DETAILS

INTITAL PAGES

Not included in word count

Title page (inc your name date of submission course title of dissertation)

DedicationsAcknowledgmentsForeword

List of ChartsTables

List of Abbreviations

Table of Contents

Abstract This is a very brief section at the beginning of the dissertation which gives the reader an overview of the contents of the dissertation It includes Brief description of the research problem Methods used Findings obtained Conclusion and implications (Approx 500 words)

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

Approx 1000 words

This chapter should reflect the scope of the research outlining the size

of the problem the rationale behind pursuing such an investigation and

any personal motivations prompting the investigation It is imperative

that the chapter includes clearly stated aims which lead to a well-

formulated research question which is then interpreted through a brief

selection of objectives The objective of the chapter is to introduce the

reader to the work as much as give them an impression what to expect

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

CHAPTER 2 LITERATURE REVIEW

Approx 4000 words

This chapter should be a reworked and modified submission that

students have developed in the preceding semester while undertaking

their pathway core module Students are expected to re-draft the

chapter to ensure that it fits in the context of the whole dissertation and

is no longer a stand-alone piece

The chapter describes and defines the context of the dissertation The

chapter needs to define and explain the intended meaning behind the

research question It should be focused and explore the relationships

between concepts noted in the research question as well as

demonstrate critical thinking drawn from the academic sources relevant

to the research question

The objective of the chapter is to allow reader to recognise the broader

frameworks supporting the undertaken research and the wider linkages

that exist beyond the scope of the research whilst engaging with ways

these debates impact the undertaken research

CHAPTER 3 PROCESS OF RESEARCH

Approx 1500 words

This chapter provides an overview of how the research was conducted

Although there is some expectation of a more descriptive approach

(simply describing the process of data collection) for the most part

students are expected to reflect upon the appropriateness of the steps

they took to their given research question Thus the tone of the chapter

should be more reflective and focused on examining the

appropriateness of the undertaken process and the supporting

methodology It is imperative that any methodological choices and

decisions are argued against the overall research question to

demonstrate the rigour of the process During the research process

secondary data is essential and primary data is desirable

Students should cover for example

the types of decisions they had made in order to respond to their research question and the impact of those decisions on shaping the investigation

the rationale behind the choice of research methods

what data is appropriate and how was it sourced

what were obstacles and how they were overcome

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

how reliability and validity have been ensured

what were the limitations of the data collection The above points are to be used as a guiding framework and by all

means are not seen as exhaustive

The objective of the chapter is to clearly stipulate the process supporting

the given research question and give the reader a clear indication

whether the research has been undertaken with academic rigour

CHAPTER 4 PRESENTATION OF FINDINGS

Approx 3000 words

The chapter acts as a showcase of the submission It places the research

question at its centre and methodically presents a response to it It is

here that students describe what they have found out what data sets

have given particular insights and how those insights illuminate the

research question It is imperative that the content of the chapter is not

seen as simple description of the collected data but rather a narrative is

presented that offers data analysis and critical interrogation in light of

the research question Part of the analysis should also include

recognition of the underpinning literature review which would further

the analysis process In short students should briefly present the data

focus on conducting a thorough analysis of it and presentexplain the

outcomes of said analysis in the critical context of their literature review

The objective of the chapter is to provide the reader with a critical

narrative that respond to the research question where the focus is not

just on what has been discovered but also why any of that information

is meaning full to the undertaken study

CHAPTER 5 CONCLUSION AND

RECOMMENDATIONS

Approx 2000 words

This culminating chapter returns to the initial presented aims research

question and objectives and provides an overall response to them as

derived from the previous chapters The chapter should offer concluding

remarks not only in response to the research question but also highlights

the gained insights The chapter should also provide recommendation in

response to the research question either in terms of specific actions or

further research It is imperative that the chapter clearly stems from the

preceding chapters and does not stand on its own

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

REFERENCES

(Not included in the word count)

This part of the dissertation lists what research sources were used across the whole submission apart from the actual collected data The data sources would be listed in chapter 3 and evidenced in appendices

All books articles sources of statistical data and web sites used in the

dissertation must be listed in this chapter Additional sources consulted

should also be placed in this section

Entries must be formatted using the Harvard Referencing system (see

Appendix 2)

APPENDICES

(Not included in the word count)

All quantitative working (eg screen prints from SPSS) organograms

organisation policies and procedures letters of

authorisationconfidentiality agreements progress reportsmeeting

notesother relevant communications sample observationfield notes

any visual records of data etc

To qualify for inclusion in the Appendices material should be referred to

somewhere within the body of the dissertation Eg Example of

instrument for primary data collection eg base questionnaire

structured interview pro-forma Also one example of respondent

feedback eg completed questionnaire transcript of interview (can be

coded for confidentiality although supervisor should be aware of

source)

FORMATTINGGENERAL a Headers (containing short title of dissertation) and Footers (containing Student

Name Module Code and Page Numbering) are required b Text alignment should be fully justified (ie in a block with no ragged right margin) c All spacing between paragraphs should be consistent d Type font Times RomanCourierArial size 12 e All headings should be Bold f Accurate Harvard Referencing must be used throughout (see Skills Handbook for

info) g Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via BlackBoard No hard copy

submissions are required or accepted

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 1

Supervisorrsquos feedback and Student support sheet

Support Sheet for NAME OF STUDENT__________________________________ Areas for development and support

Yes

Abstract and Introduction Does the student still need support with writing the abstract

Clarity Logic Critical

Literature Review Does the student still need support with referencing

Literature Review Does the literature review need to separate description from critical review

Methodology Would the student benefit for additional tutorials on (tick those that apply)

Justification of the design adopted Sampling Data Collection instruments Pre-testing ModelsConcepts employed Reflexive approach Ethical Issues Limitations Feasibility Replicability Interviews Quantitative collection

Others (please specify)

Findings Would it be useful for the student to do a tutorial on presenting findingscomparison Or addressing the meaning of results Analysis Is it recommended that support is offered in identifying

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

description from connecting and substantiating arguments when analysing research data

Other Issues If you believe that in addition to the tutorials and supervision the student could benefit from an additional tutorial to refresh on a particular area please let us know If supervision and tutorials have been sufficient for the needs of the studentrsquos research and dissertation return the form to indicate you have carried out the feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 2

The Harvard Referencing System In-text references

For citations inside the text all we need is just the authorrsquos surname and the year his work was published When we quote the exact words from a work we also add the page numbers in which the quotation appears in our source Watch the following variations

INDIRECT QUOTATIONS (PARAPHRASING SUMMARISING) When we present details from a source in our own words (paraphrasing or summarising) then our quotations are called indirect quotations The way we present them in the text is the following When we donrsquot use the authorrsquos name inside the text we place both the name and the year in a parenthesis

While information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements (Dacey 2002)

When we place the authorrsquos name inside the text we put the year of publication in the parenthesis immediately after the surname

As Dacey (2002) writes although information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements

If the source is written by two authors

Earlier (Vroom and Jago 1988) we described a systematic evaluation Vroom and Yetton (1973) studied this potential limitation

If the authors of one work are more than two we use only the surname of the first author mentioned and then the abbreviation et al (et alia Latin ldquoand othersrdquo)

the ability to respond intuitively and often very rapidly (Bar-Tel et al 1999) ishellip Crossan et al (1999) stress that the subconscious is critical to understanding how people come to

If we cite more than two authors in a sentence

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Several decades later participation became a key ingredient of several management theories including those of Likert (1967) Maier (1970) and Hersey and Blanchard (1982)

Note that when we place information inside the parenthesis we use a semi-colon to separate one source from the other

Although much recent research has focused on the importance of long-term strategic relationships (Morgan and Hunt 1994 Wilson 1995) hellip

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is expanding at a rapid rate and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiations (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999) as well as frameworks unique to a specific culture (Fang 1997 Faure 1998 Kumar 1999)

If the author has published two or more works in the same year we distinguish between them by adding the letters a b c etc closed up to the year of publication to indicate the order in which they were published

Such is the scale of improvement within less than a year (Burt 2000a)

If we need to refer to two works by the same author published in the same year

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000a b)

If our source is trustworthy but the authorrsquos name is not known we use the name of the source in the text

More people than ever seem to be using retail home delivery (The Times 1996) in order to unlock greater growth and competitiveness (European Commission 1998) so that local organizations can help new and growing businesses (DTI 2002)

Note that when the name of the source is too long and we use initials in the text then we should not forget to provide the full name at the end of our assignment in the reference list bibliography (eg DTI Department of Trade and Industry) If our source is from the internet we follow the same principle

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 6: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Final Dissertation The student will be assessed on their final submitted dissertation of 10000-12000 words Students can work into two different directions or even both namely an empirical study using primary or secondary data a literature review with a critical analysis and an extended case study based on theoretical aspects of the theory delivered in lectures The hereunder structure is indicative for a combination of a literature review with empirical results The format and the type of the submitted work is the result of a mutual agreement between the supervisor and the student

Final dissertation structure

SECTIONWORD COUNT

WEIGHTING

DETAILS

INTITAL PAGES

Not included in word count

Title page (inc your name date of submission course title of dissertation)

DedicationsAcknowledgmentsForeword

List of ChartsTables

List of Abbreviations

Table of Contents

Abstract This is a very brief section at the beginning of the dissertation which gives the reader an overview of the contents of the dissertation It includes Brief description of the research problem Methods used Findings obtained Conclusion and implications (Approx 500 words)

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

Approx 1000 words

This chapter should reflect the scope of the research outlining the size

of the problem the rationale behind pursuing such an investigation and

any personal motivations prompting the investigation It is imperative

that the chapter includes clearly stated aims which lead to a well-

formulated research question which is then interpreted through a brief

selection of objectives The objective of the chapter is to introduce the

reader to the work as much as give them an impression what to expect

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

CHAPTER 2 LITERATURE REVIEW

Approx 4000 words

This chapter should be a reworked and modified submission that

students have developed in the preceding semester while undertaking

their pathway core module Students are expected to re-draft the

chapter to ensure that it fits in the context of the whole dissertation and

is no longer a stand-alone piece

The chapter describes and defines the context of the dissertation The

chapter needs to define and explain the intended meaning behind the

research question It should be focused and explore the relationships

between concepts noted in the research question as well as

demonstrate critical thinking drawn from the academic sources relevant

to the research question

The objective of the chapter is to allow reader to recognise the broader

frameworks supporting the undertaken research and the wider linkages

that exist beyond the scope of the research whilst engaging with ways

these debates impact the undertaken research

CHAPTER 3 PROCESS OF RESEARCH

Approx 1500 words

This chapter provides an overview of how the research was conducted

Although there is some expectation of a more descriptive approach

(simply describing the process of data collection) for the most part

students are expected to reflect upon the appropriateness of the steps

they took to their given research question Thus the tone of the chapter

should be more reflective and focused on examining the

appropriateness of the undertaken process and the supporting

methodology It is imperative that any methodological choices and

decisions are argued against the overall research question to

demonstrate the rigour of the process During the research process

secondary data is essential and primary data is desirable

Students should cover for example

the types of decisions they had made in order to respond to their research question and the impact of those decisions on shaping the investigation

the rationale behind the choice of research methods

what data is appropriate and how was it sourced

what were obstacles and how they were overcome

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

how reliability and validity have been ensured

what were the limitations of the data collection The above points are to be used as a guiding framework and by all

means are not seen as exhaustive

The objective of the chapter is to clearly stipulate the process supporting

the given research question and give the reader a clear indication

whether the research has been undertaken with academic rigour

CHAPTER 4 PRESENTATION OF FINDINGS

Approx 3000 words

The chapter acts as a showcase of the submission It places the research

question at its centre and methodically presents a response to it It is

here that students describe what they have found out what data sets

have given particular insights and how those insights illuminate the

research question It is imperative that the content of the chapter is not

seen as simple description of the collected data but rather a narrative is

presented that offers data analysis and critical interrogation in light of

the research question Part of the analysis should also include

recognition of the underpinning literature review which would further

the analysis process In short students should briefly present the data

focus on conducting a thorough analysis of it and presentexplain the

outcomes of said analysis in the critical context of their literature review

The objective of the chapter is to provide the reader with a critical

narrative that respond to the research question where the focus is not

just on what has been discovered but also why any of that information

is meaning full to the undertaken study

CHAPTER 5 CONCLUSION AND

RECOMMENDATIONS

Approx 2000 words

This culminating chapter returns to the initial presented aims research

question and objectives and provides an overall response to them as

derived from the previous chapters The chapter should offer concluding

remarks not only in response to the research question but also highlights

the gained insights The chapter should also provide recommendation in

response to the research question either in terms of specific actions or

further research It is imperative that the chapter clearly stems from the

preceding chapters and does not stand on its own

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

REFERENCES

(Not included in the word count)

This part of the dissertation lists what research sources were used across the whole submission apart from the actual collected data The data sources would be listed in chapter 3 and evidenced in appendices

All books articles sources of statistical data and web sites used in the

dissertation must be listed in this chapter Additional sources consulted

should also be placed in this section

Entries must be formatted using the Harvard Referencing system (see

Appendix 2)

APPENDICES

(Not included in the word count)

All quantitative working (eg screen prints from SPSS) organograms

organisation policies and procedures letters of

authorisationconfidentiality agreements progress reportsmeeting

notesother relevant communications sample observationfield notes

any visual records of data etc

To qualify for inclusion in the Appendices material should be referred to

somewhere within the body of the dissertation Eg Example of

instrument for primary data collection eg base questionnaire

structured interview pro-forma Also one example of respondent

feedback eg completed questionnaire transcript of interview (can be

coded for confidentiality although supervisor should be aware of

source)

FORMATTINGGENERAL a Headers (containing short title of dissertation) and Footers (containing Student

Name Module Code and Page Numbering) are required b Text alignment should be fully justified (ie in a block with no ragged right margin) c All spacing between paragraphs should be consistent d Type font Times RomanCourierArial size 12 e All headings should be Bold f Accurate Harvard Referencing must be used throughout (see Skills Handbook for

info) g Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via BlackBoard No hard copy

submissions are required or accepted

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 1

Supervisorrsquos feedback and Student support sheet

Support Sheet for NAME OF STUDENT__________________________________ Areas for development and support

Yes

Abstract and Introduction Does the student still need support with writing the abstract

Clarity Logic Critical

Literature Review Does the student still need support with referencing

Literature Review Does the literature review need to separate description from critical review

Methodology Would the student benefit for additional tutorials on (tick those that apply)

Justification of the design adopted Sampling Data Collection instruments Pre-testing ModelsConcepts employed Reflexive approach Ethical Issues Limitations Feasibility Replicability Interviews Quantitative collection

Others (please specify)

Findings Would it be useful for the student to do a tutorial on presenting findingscomparison Or addressing the meaning of results Analysis Is it recommended that support is offered in identifying

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

description from connecting and substantiating arguments when analysing research data

Other Issues If you believe that in addition to the tutorials and supervision the student could benefit from an additional tutorial to refresh on a particular area please let us know If supervision and tutorials have been sufficient for the needs of the studentrsquos research and dissertation return the form to indicate you have carried out the feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 2

The Harvard Referencing System In-text references

For citations inside the text all we need is just the authorrsquos surname and the year his work was published When we quote the exact words from a work we also add the page numbers in which the quotation appears in our source Watch the following variations

INDIRECT QUOTATIONS (PARAPHRASING SUMMARISING) When we present details from a source in our own words (paraphrasing or summarising) then our quotations are called indirect quotations The way we present them in the text is the following When we donrsquot use the authorrsquos name inside the text we place both the name and the year in a parenthesis

While information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements (Dacey 2002)

When we place the authorrsquos name inside the text we put the year of publication in the parenthesis immediately after the surname

As Dacey (2002) writes although information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements

If the source is written by two authors

Earlier (Vroom and Jago 1988) we described a systematic evaluation Vroom and Yetton (1973) studied this potential limitation

If the authors of one work are more than two we use only the surname of the first author mentioned and then the abbreviation et al (et alia Latin ldquoand othersrdquo)

the ability to respond intuitively and often very rapidly (Bar-Tel et al 1999) ishellip Crossan et al (1999) stress that the subconscious is critical to understanding how people come to

If we cite more than two authors in a sentence

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Several decades later participation became a key ingredient of several management theories including those of Likert (1967) Maier (1970) and Hersey and Blanchard (1982)

Note that when we place information inside the parenthesis we use a semi-colon to separate one source from the other

Although much recent research has focused on the importance of long-term strategic relationships (Morgan and Hunt 1994 Wilson 1995) hellip

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is expanding at a rapid rate and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiations (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999) as well as frameworks unique to a specific culture (Fang 1997 Faure 1998 Kumar 1999)

If the author has published two or more works in the same year we distinguish between them by adding the letters a b c etc closed up to the year of publication to indicate the order in which they were published

Such is the scale of improvement within less than a year (Burt 2000a)

If we need to refer to two works by the same author published in the same year

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000a b)

If our source is trustworthy but the authorrsquos name is not known we use the name of the source in the text

More people than ever seem to be using retail home delivery (The Times 1996) in order to unlock greater growth and competitiveness (European Commission 1998) so that local organizations can help new and growing businesses (DTI 2002)

Note that when the name of the source is too long and we use initials in the text then we should not forget to provide the full name at the end of our assignment in the reference list bibliography (eg DTI Department of Trade and Industry) If our source is from the internet we follow the same principle

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 7: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

CHAPTER 2 LITERATURE REVIEW

Approx 4000 words

This chapter should be a reworked and modified submission that

students have developed in the preceding semester while undertaking

their pathway core module Students are expected to re-draft the

chapter to ensure that it fits in the context of the whole dissertation and

is no longer a stand-alone piece

The chapter describes and defines the context of the dissertation The

chapter needs to define and explain the intended meaning behind the

research question It should be focused and explore the relationships

between concepts noted in the research question as well as

demonstrate critical thinking drawn from the academic sources relevant

to the research question

The objective of the chapter is to allow reader to recognise the broader

frameworks supporting the undertaken research and the wider linkages

that exist beyond the scope of the research whilst engaging with ways

these debates impact the undertaken research

CHAPTER 3 PROCESS OF RESEARCH

Approx 1500 words

This chapter provides an overview of how the research was conducted

Although there is some expectation of a more descriptive approach

(simply describing the process of data collection) for the most part

students are expected to reflect upon the appropriateness of the steps

they took to their given research question Thus the tone of the chapter

should be more reflective and focused on examining the

appropriateness of the undertaken process and the supporting

methodology It is imperative that any methodological choices and

decisions are argued against the overall research question to

demonstrate the rigour of the process During the research process

secondary data is essential and primary data is desirable

Students should cover for example

the types of decisions they had made in order to respond to their research question and the impact of those decisions on shaping the investigation

the rationale behind the choice of research methods

what data is appropriate and how was it sourced

what were obstacles and how they were overcome

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

how reliability and validity have been ensured

what were the limitations of the data collection The above points are to be used as a guiding framework and by all

means are not seen as exhaustive

The objective of the chapter is to clearly stipulate the process supporting

the given research question and give the reader a clear indication

whether the research has been undertaken with academic rigour

CHAPTER 4 PRESENTATION OF FINDINGS

Approx 3000 words

The chapter acts as a showcase of the submission It places the research

question at its centre and methodically presents a response to it It is

here that students describe what they have found out what data sets

have given particular insights and how those insights illuminate the

research question It is imperative that the content of the chapter is not

seen as simple description of the collected data but rather a narrative is

presented that offers data analysis and critical interrogation in light of

the research question Part of the analysis should also include

recognition of the underpinning literature review which would further

the analysis process In short students should briefly present the data

focus on conducting a thorough analysis of it and presentexplain the

outcomes of said analysis in the critical context of their literature review

The objective of the chapter is to provide the reader with a critical

narrative that respond to the research question where the focus is not

just on what has been discovered but also why any of that information

is meaning full to the undertaken study

CHAPTER 5 CONCLUSION AND

RECOMMENDATIONS

Approx 2000 words

This culminating chapter returns to the initial presented aims research

question and objectives and provides an overall response to them as

derived from the previous chapters The chapter should offer concluding

remarks not only in response to the research question but also highlights

the gained insights The chapter should also provide recommendation in

response to the research question either in terms of specific actions or

further research It is imperative that the chapter clearly stems from the

preceding chapters and does not stand on its own

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

REFERENCES

(Not included in the word count)

This part of the dissertation lists what research sources were used across the whole submission apart from the actual collected data The data sources would be listed in chapter 3 and evidenced in appendices

All books articles sources of statistical data and web sites used in the

dissertation must be listed in this chapter Additional sources consulted

should also be placed in this section

Entries must be formatted using the Harvard Referencing system (see

Appendix 2)

APPENDICES

(Not included in the word count)

All quantitative working (eg screen prints from SPSS) organograms

organisation policies and procedures letters of

authorisationconfidentiality agreements progress reportsmeeting

notesother relevant communications sample observationfield notes

any visual records of data etc

To qualify for inclusion in the Appendices material should be referred to

somewhere within the body of the dissertation Eg Example of

instrument for primary data collection eg base questionnaire

structured interview pro-forma Also one example of respondent

feedback eg completed questionnaire transcript of interview (can be

coded for confidentiality although supervisor should be aware of

source)

FORMATTINGGENERAL a Headers (containing short title of dissertation) and Footers (containing Student

Name Module Code and Page Numbering) are required b Text alignment should be fully justified (ie in a block with no ragged right margin) c All spacing between paragraphs should be consistent d Type font Times RomanCourierArial size 12 e All headings should be Bold f Accurate Harvard Referencing must be used throughout (see Skills Handbook for

info) g Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via BlackBoard No hard copy

submissions are required or accepted

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 1

Supervisorrsquos feedback and Student support sheet

Support Sheet for NAME OF STUDENT__________________________________ Areas for development and support

Yes

Abstract and Introduction Does the student still need support with writing the abstract

Clarity Logic Critical

Literature Review Does the student still need support with referencing

Literature Review Does the literature review need to separate description from critical review

Methodology Would the student benefit for additional tutorials on (tick those that apply)

Justification of the design adopted Sampling Data Collection instruments Pre-testing ModelsConcepts employed Reflexive approach Ethical Issues Limitations Feasibility Replicability Interviews Quantitative collection

Others (please specify)

Findings Would it be useful for the student to do a tutorial on presenting findingscomparison Or addressing the meaning of results Analysis Is it recommended that support is offered in identifying

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

description from connecting and substantiating arguments when analysing research data

Other Issues If you believe that in addition to the tutorials and supervision the student could benefit from an additional tutorial to refresh on a particular area please let us know If supervision and tutorials have been sufficient for the needs of the studentrsquos research and dissertation return the form to indicate you have carried out the feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 2

The Harvard Referencing System In-text references

For citations inside the text all we need is just the authorrsquos surname and the year his work was published When we quote the exact words from a work we also add the page numbers in which the quotation appears in our source Watch the following variations

INDIRECT QUOTATIONS (PARAPHRASING SUMMARISING) When we present details from a source in our own words (paraphrasing or summarising) then our quotations are called indirect quotations The way we present them in the text is the following When we donrsquot use the authorrsquos name inside the text we place both the name and the year in a parenthesis

While information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements (Dacey 2002)

When we place the authorrsquos name inside the text we put the year of publication in the parenthesis immediately after the surname

As Dacey (2002) writes although information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements

If the source is written by two authors

Earlier (Vroom and Jago 1988) we described a systematic evaluation Vroom and Yetton (1973) studied this potential limitation

If the authors of one work are more than two we use only the surname of the first author mentioned and then the abbreviation et al (et alia Latin ldquoand othersrdquo)

the ability to respond intuitively and often very rapidly (Bar-Tel et al 1999) ishellip Crossan et al (1999) stress that the subconscious is critical to understanding how people come to

If we cite more than two authors in a sentence

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Several decades later participation became a key ingredient of several management theories including those of Likert (1967) Maier (1970) and Hersey and Blanchard (1982)

Note that when we place information inside the parenthesis we use a semi-colon to separate one source from the other

Although much recent research has focused on the importance of long-term strategic relationships (Morgan and Hunt 1994 Wilson 1995) hellip

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is expanding at a rapid rate and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiations (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999) as well as frameworks unique to a specific culture (Fang 1997 Faure 1998 Kumar 1999)

If the author has published two or more works in the same year we distinguish between them by adding the letters a b c etc closed up to the year of publication to indicate the order in which they were published

Such is the scale of improvement within less than a year (Burt 2000a)

If we need to refer to two works by the same author published in the same year

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000a b)

If our source is trustworthy but the authorrsquos name is not known we use the name of the source in the text

More people than ever seem to be using retail home delivery (The Times 1996) in order to unlock greater growth and competitiveness (European Commission 1998) so that local organizations can help new and growing businesses (DTI 2002)

Note that when the name of the source is too long and we use initials in the text then we should not forget to provide the full name at the end of our assignment in the reference list bibliography (eg DTI Department of Trade and Industry) If our source is from the internet we follow the same principle

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 8: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

how reliability and validity have been ensured

what were the limitations of the data collection The above points are to be used as a guiding framework and by all

means are not seen as exhaustive

The objective of the chapter is to clearly stipulate the process supporting

the given research question and give the reader a clear indication

whether the research has been undertaken with academic rigour

CHAPTER 4 PRESENTATION OF FINDINGS

Approx 3000 words

The chapter acts as a showcase of the submission It places the research

question at its centre and methodically presents a response to it It is

here that students describe what they have found out what data sets

have given particular insights and how those insights illuminate the

research question It is imperative that the content of the chapter is not

seen as simple description of the collected data but rather a narrative is

presented that offers data analysis and critical interrogation in light of

the research question Part of the analysis should also include

recognition of the underpinning literature review which would further

the analysis process In short students should briefly present the data

focus on conducting a thorough analysis of it and presentexplain the

outcomes of said analysis in the critical context of their literature review

The objective of the chapter is to provide the reader with a critical

narrative that respond to the research question where the focus is not

just on what has been discovered but also why any of that information

is meaning full to the undertaken study

CHAPTER 5 CONCLUSION AND

RECOMMENDATIONS

Approx 2000 words

This culminating chapter returns to the initial presented aims research

question and objectives and provides an overall response to them as

derived from the previous chapters The chapter should offer concluding

remarks not only in response to the research question but also highlights

the gained insights The chapter should also provide recommendation in

response to the research question either in terms of specific actions or

further research It is imperative that the chapter clearly stems from the

preceding chapters and does not stand on its own

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

REFERENCES

(Not included in the word count)

This part of the dissertation lists what research sources were used across the whole submission apart from the actual collected data The data sources would be listed in chapter 3 and evidenced in appendices

All books articles sources of statistical data and web sites used in the

dissertation must be listed in this chapter Additional sources consulted

should also be placed in this section

Entries must be formatted using the Harvard Referencing system (see

Appendix 2)

APPENDICES

(Not included in the word count)

All quantitative working (eg screen prints from SPSS) organograms

organisation policies and procedures letters of

authorisationconfidentiality agreements progress reportsmeeting

notesother relevant communications sample observationfield notes

any visual records of data etc

To qualify for inclusion in the Appendices material should be referred to

somewhere within the body of the dissertation Eg Example of

instrument for primary data collection eg base questionnaire

structured interview pro-forma Also one example of respondent

feedback eg completed questionnaire transcript of interview (can be

coded for confidentiality although supervisor should be aware of

source)

FORMATTINGGENERAL a Headers (containing short title of dissertation) and Footers (containing Student

Name Module Code and Page Numbering) are required b Text alignment should be fully justified (ie in a block with no ragged right margin) c All spacing between paragraphs should be consistent d Type font Times RomanCourierArial size 12 e All headings should be Bold f Accurate Harvard Referencing must be used throughout (see Skills Handbook for

info) g Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via BlackBoard No hard copy

submissions are required or accepted

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 1

Supervisorrsquos feedback and Student support sheet

Support Sheet for NAME OF STUDENT__________________________________ Areas for development and support

Yes

Abstract and Introduction Does the student still need support with writing the abstract

Clarity Logic Critical

Literature Review Does the student still need support with referencing

Literature Review Does the literature review need to separate description from critical review

Methodology Would the student benefit for additional tutorials on (tick those that apply)

Justification of the design adopted Sampling Data Collection instruments Pre-testing ModelsConcepts employed Reflexive approach Ethical Issues Limitations Feasibility Replicability Interviews Quantitative collection

Others (please specify)

Findings Would it be useful for the student to do a tutorial on presenting findingscomparison Or addressing the meaning of results Analysis Is it recommended that support is offered in identifying

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

description from connecting and substantiating arguments when analysing research data

Other Issues If you believe that in addition to the tutorials and supervision the student could benefit from an additional tutorial to refresh on a particular area please let us know If supervision and tutorials have been sufficient for the needs of the studentrsquos research and dissertation return the form to indicate you have carried out the feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 2

The Harvard Referencing System In-text references

For citations inside the text all we need is just the authorrsquos surname and the year his work was published When we quote the exact words from a work we also add the page numbers in which the quotation appears in our source Watch the following variations

INDIRECT QUOTATIONS (PARAPHRASING SUMMARISING) When we present details from a source in our own words (paraphrasing or summarising) then our quotations are called indirect quotations The way we present them in the text is the following When we donrsquot use the authorrsquos name inside the text we place both the name and the year in a parenthesis

While information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements (Dacey 2002)

When we place the authorrsquos name inside the text we put the year of publication in the parenthesis immediately after the surname

As Dacey (2002) writes although information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements

If the source is written by two authors

Earlier (Vroom and Jago 1988) we described a systematic evaluation Vroom and Yetton (1973) studied this potential limitation

If the authors of one work are more than two we use only the surname of the first author mentioned and then the abbreviation et al (et alia Latin ldquoand othersrdquo)

the ability to respond intuitively and often very rapidly (Bar-Tel et al 1999) ishellip Crossan et al (1999) stress that the subconscious is critical to understanding how people come to

If we cite more than two authors in a sentence

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Several decades later participation became a key ingredient of several management theories including those of Likert (1967) Maier (1970) and Hersey and Blanchard (1982)

Note that when we place information inside the parenthesis we use a semi-colon to separate one source from the other

Although much recent research has focused on the importance of long-term strategic relationships (Morgan and Hunt 1994 Wilson 1995) hellip

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is expanding at a rapid rate and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiations (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999) as well as frameworks unique to a specific culture (Fang 1997 Faure 1998 Kumar 1999)

If the author has published two or more works in the same year we distinguish between them by adding the letters a b c etc closed up to the year of publication to indicate the order in which they were published

Such is the scale of improvement within less than a year (Burt 2000a)

If we need to refer to two works by the same author published in the same year

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000a b)

If our source is trustworthy but the authorrsquos name is not known we use the name of the source in the text

More people than ever seem to be using retail home delivery (The Times 1996) in order to unlock greater growth and competitiveness (European Commission 1998) so that local organizations can help new and growing businesses (DTI 2002)

Note that when the name of the source is too long and we use initials in the text then we should not forget to provide the full name at the end of our assignment in the reference list bibliography (eg DTI Department of Trade and Industry) If our source is from the internet we follow the same principle

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 9: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

REFERENCES

(Not included in the word count)

This part of the dissertation lists what research sources were used across the whole submission apart from the actual collected data The data sources would be listed in chapter 3 and evidenced in appendices

All books articles sources of statistical data and web sites used in the

dissertation must be listed in this chapter Additional sources consulted

should also be placed in this section

Entries must be formatted using the Harvard Referencing system (see

Appendix 2)

APPENDICES

(Not included in the word count)

All quantitative working (eg screen prints from SPSS) organograms

organisation policies and procedures letters of

authorisationconfidentiality agreements progress reportsmeeting

notesother relevant communications sample observationfield notes

any visual records of data etc

To qualify for inclusion in the Appendices material should be referred to

somewhere within the body of the dissertation Eg Example of

instrument for primary data collection eg base questionnaire

structured interview pro-forma Also one example of respondent

feedback eg completed questionnaire transcript of interview (can be

coded for confidentiality although supervisor should be aware of

source)

FORMATTINGGENERAL a Headers (containing short title of dissertation) and Footers (containing Student

Name Module Code and Page Numbering) are required b Text alignment should be fully justified (ie in a block with no ragged right margin) c All spacing between paragraphs should be consistent d Type font Times RomanCourierArial size 12 e All headings should be Bold f Accurate Harvard Referencing must be used throughout (see Skills Handbook for

info) g Students must submit 1 electronic copy only via BlackBoard No hard copy

submissions are required or accepted

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 1

Supervisorrsquos feedback and Student support sheet

Support Sheet for NAME OF STUDENT__________________________________ Areas for development and support

Yes

Abstract and Introduction Does the student still need support with writing the abstract

Clarity Logic Critical

Literature Review Does the student still need support with referencing

Literature Review Does the literature review need to separate description from critical review

Methodology Would the student benefit for additional tutorials on (tick those that apply)

Justification of the design adopted Sampling Data Collection instruments Pre-testing ModelsConcepts employed Reflexive approach Ethical Issues Limitations Feasibility Replicability Interviews Quantitative collection

Others (please specify)

Findings Would it be useful for the student to do a tutorial on presenting findingscomparison Or addressing the meaning of results Analysis Is it recommended that support is offered in identifying

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

description from connecting and substantiating arguments when analysing research data

Other Issues If you believe that in addition to the tutorials and supervision the student could benefit from an additional tutorial to refresh on a particular area please let us know If supervision and tutorials have been sufficient for the needs of the studentrsquos research and dissertation return the form to indicate you have carried out the feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 2

The Harvard Referencing System In-text references

For citations inside the text all we need is just the authorrsquos surname and the year his work was published When we quote the exact words from a work we also add the page numbers in which the quotation appears in our source Watch the following variations

INDIRECT QUOTATIONS (PARAPHRASING SUMMARISING) When we present details from a source in our own words (paraphrasing or summarising) then our quotations are called indirect quotations The way we present them in the text is the following When we donrsquot use the authorrsquos name inside the text we place both the name and the year in a parenthesis

While information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements (Dacey 2002)

When we place the authorrsquos name inside the text we put the year of publication in the parenthesis immediately after the surname

As Dacey (2002) writes although information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements

If the source is written by two authors

Earlier (Vroom and Jago 1988) we described a systematic evaluation Vroom and Yetton (1973) studied this potential limitation

If the authors of one work are more than two we use only the surname of the first author mentioned and then the abbreviation et al (et alia Latin ldquoand othersrdquo)

the ability to respond intuitively and often very rapidly (Bar-Tel et al 1999) ishellip Crossan et al (1999) stress that the subconscious is critical to understanding how people come to

If we cite more than two authors in a sentence

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Several decades later participation became a key ingredient of several management theories including those of Likert (1967) Maier (1970) and Hersey and Blanchard (1982)

Note that when we place information inside the parenthesis we use a semi-colon to separate one source from the other

Although much recent research has focused on the importance of long-term strategic relationships (Morgan and Hunt 1994 Wilson 1995) hellip

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is expanding at a rapid rate and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiations (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999) as well as frameworks unique to a specific culture (Fang 1997 Faure 1998 Kumar 1999)

If the author has published two or more works in the same year we distinguish between them by adding the letters a b c etc closed up to the year of publication to indicate the order in which they were published

Such is the scale of improvement within less than a year (Burt 2000a)

If we need to refer to two works by the same author published in the same year

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000a b)

If our source is trustworthy but the authorrsquos name is not known we use the name of the source in the text

More people than ever seem to be using retail home delivery (The Times 1996) in order to unlock greater growth and competitiveness (European Commission 1998) so that local organizations can help new and growing businesses (DTI 2002)

Note that when the name of the source is too long and we use initials in the text then we should not forget to provide the full name at the end of our assignment in the reference list bibliography (eg DTI Department of Trade and Industry) If our source is from the internet we follow the same principle

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 10: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 1

Supervisorrsquos feedback and Student support sheet

Support Sheet for NAME OF STUDENT__________________________________ Areas for development and support

Yes

Abstract and Introduction Does the student still need support with writing the abstract

Clarity Logic Critical

Literature Review Does the student still need support with referencing

Literature Review Does the literature review need to separate description from critical review

Methodology Would the student benefit for additional tutorials on (tick those that apply)

Justification of the design adopted Sampling Data Collection instruments Pre-testing ModelsConcepts employed Reflexive approach Ethical Issues Limitations Feasibility Replicability Interviews Quantitative collection

Others (please specify)

Findings Would it be useful for the student to do a tutorial on presenting findingscomparison Or addressing the meaning of results Analysis Is it recommended that support is offered in identifying

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

description from connecting and substantiating arguments when analysing research data

Other Issues If you believe that in addition to the tutorials and supervision the student could benefit from an additional tutorial to refresh on a particular area please let us know If supervision and tutorials have been sufficient for the needs of the studentrsquos research and dissertation return the form to indicate you have carried out the feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 2

The Harvard Referencing System In-text references

For citations inside the text all we need is just the authorrsquos surname and the year his work was published When we quote the exact words from a work we also add the page numbers in which the quotation appears in our source Watch the following variations

INDIRECT QUOTATIONS (PARAPHRASING SUMMARISING) When we present details from a source in our own words (paraphrasing or summarising) then our quotations are called indirect quotations The way we present them in the text is the following When we donrsquot use the authorrsquos name inside the text we place both the name and the year in a parenthesis

While information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements (Dacey 2002)

When we place the authorrsquos name inside the text we put the year of publication in the parenthesis immediately after the surname

As Dacey (2002) writes although information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements

If the source is written by two authors

Earlier (Vroom and Jago 1988) we described a systematic evaluation Vroom and Yetton (1973) studied this potential limitation

If the authors of one work are more than two we use only the surname of the first author mentioned and then the abbreviation et al (et alia Latin ldquoand othersrdquo)

the ability to respond intuitively and often very rapidly (Bar-Tel et al 1999) ishellip Crossan et al (1999) stress that the subconscious is critical to understanding how people come to

If we cite more than two authors in a sentence

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Several decades later participation became a key ingredient of several management theories including those of Likert (1967) Maier (1970) and Hersey and Blanchard (1982)

Note that when we place information inside the parenthesis we use a semi-colon to separate one source from the other

Although much recent research has focused on the importance of long-term strategic relationships (Morgan and Hunt 1994 Wilson 1995) hellip

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is expanding at a rapid rate and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiations (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999) as well as frameworks unique to a specific culture (Fang 1997 Faure 1998 Kumar 1999)

If the author has published two or more works in the same year we distinguish between them by adding the letters a b c etc closed up to the year of publication to indicate the order in which they were published

Such is the scale of improvement within less than a year (Burt 2000a)

If we need to refer to two works by the same author published in the same year

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000a b)

If our source is trustworthy but the authorrsquos name is not known we use the name of the source in the text

More people than ever seem to be using retail home delivery (The Times 1996) in order to unlock greater growth and competitiveness (European Commission 1998) so that local organizations can help new and growing businesses (DTI 2002)

Note that when the name of the source is too long and we use initials in the text then we should not forget to provide the full name at the end of our assignment in the reference list bibliography (eg DTI Department of Trade and Industry) If our source is from the internet we follow the same principle

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 11: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

description from connecting and substantiating arguments when analysing research data

Other Issues If you believe that in addition to the tutorials and supervision the student could benefit from an additional tutorial to refresh on a particular area please let us know If supervision and tutorials have been sufficient for the needs of the studentrsquos research and dissertation return the form to indicate you have carried out the feedback

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 2

The Harvard Referencing System In-text references

For citations inside the text all we need is just the authorrsquos surname and the year his work was published When we quote the exact words from a work we also add the page numbers in which the quotation appears in our source Watch the following variations

INDIRECT QUOTATIONS (PARAPHRASING SUMMARISING) When we present details from a source in our own words (paraphrasing or summarising) then our quotations are called indirect quotations The way we present them in the text is the following When we donrsquot use the authorrsquos name inside the text we place both the name and the year in a parenthesis

While information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements (Dacey 2002)

When we place the authorrsquos name inside the text we put the year of publication in the parenthesis immediately after the surname

As Dacey (2002) writes although information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements

If the source is written by two authors

Earlier (Vroom and Jago 1988) we described a systematic evaluation Vroom and Yetton (1973) studied this potential limitation

If the authors of one work are more than two we use only the surname of the first author mentioned and then the abbreviation et al (et alia Latin ldquoand othersrdquo)

the ability to respond intuitively and often very rapidly (Bar-Tel et al 1999) ishellip Crossan et al (1999) stress that the subconscious is critical to understanding how people come to

If we cite more than two authors in a sentence

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Several decades later participation became a key ingredient of several management theories including those of Likert (1967) Maier (1970) and Hersey and Blanchard (1982)

Note that when we place information inside the parenthesis we use a semi-colon to separate one source from the other

Although much recent research has focused on the importance of long-term strategic relationships (Morgan and Hunt 1994 Wilson 1995) hellip

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is expanding at a rapid rate and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiations (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999) as well as frameworks unique to a specific culture (Fang 1997 Faure 1998 Kumar 1999)

If the author has published two or more works in the same year we distinguish between them by adding the letters a b c etc closed up to the year of publication to indicate the order in which they were published

Such is the scale of improvement within less than a year (Burt 2000a)

If we need to refer to two works by the same author published in the same year

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000a b)

If our source is trustworthy but the authorrsquos name is not known we use the name of the source in the text

More people than ever seem to be using retail home delivery (The Times 1996) in order to unlock greater growth and competitiveness (European Commission 1998) so that local organizations can help new and growing businesses (DTI 2002)

Note that when the name of the source is too long and we use initials in the text then we should not forget to provide the full name at the end of our assignment in the reference list bibliography (eg DTI Department of Trade and Industry) If our source is from the internet we follow the same principle

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 12: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

APPENDIX 2

The Harvard Referencing System In-text references

For citations inside the text all we need is just the authorrsquos surname and the year his work was published When we quote the exact words from a work we also add the page numbers in which the quotation appears in our source Watch the following variations

INDIRECT QUOTATIONS (PARAPHRASING SUMMARISING) When we present details from a source in our own words (paraphrasing or summarising) then our quotations are called indirect quotations The way we present them in the text is the following When we donrsquot use the authorrsquos name inside the text we place both the name and the year in a parenthesis

While information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements (Dacey 2002)

When we place the authorrsquos name inside the text we put the year of publication in the parenthesis immediately after the surname

As Dacey (2002) writes although information sharing between the private and public sector has improved since 911 sharing of information requires additional enhancements

If the source is written by two authors

Earlier (Vroom and Jago 1988) we described a systematic evaluation Vroom and Yetton (1973) studied this potential limitation

If the authors of one work are more than two we use only the surname of the first author mentioned and then the abbreviation et al (et alia Latin ldquoand othersrdquo)

the ability to respond intuitively and often very rapidly (Bar-Tel et al 1999) ishellip Crossan et al (1999) stress that the subconscious is critical to understanding how people come to

If we cite more than two authors in a sentence

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Several decades later participation became a key ingredient of several management theories including those of Likert (1967) Maier (1970) and Hersey and Blanchard (1982)

Note that when we place information inside the parenthesis we use a semi-colon to separate one source from the other

Although much recent research has focused on the importance of long-term strategic relationships (Morgan and Hunt 1994 Wilson 1995) hellip

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is expanding at a rapid rate and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiations (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999) as well as frameworks unique to a specific culture (Fang 1997 Faure 1998 Kumar 1999)

If the author has published two or more works in the same year we distinguish between them by adding the letters a b c etc closed up to the year of publication to indicate the order in which they were published

Such is the scale of improvement within less than a year (Burt 2000a)

If we need to refer to two works by the same author published in the same year

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000a b)

If our source is trustworthy but the authorrsquos name is not known we use the name of the source in the text

More people than ever seem to be using retail home delivery (The Times 1996) in order to unlock greater growth and competitiveness (European Commission 1998) so that local organizations can help new and growing businesses (DTI 2002)

Note that when the name of the source is too long and we use initials in the text then we should not forget to provide the full name at the end of our assignment in the reference list bibliography (eg DTI Department of Trade and Industry) If our source is from the internet we follow the same principle

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 13: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Several decades later participation became a key ingredient of several management theories including those of Likert (1967) Maier (1970) and Hersey and Blanchard (1982)

Note that when we place information inside the parenthesis we use a semi-colon to separate one source from the other

Although much recent research has focused on the importance of long-term strategic relationships (Morgan and Hunt 1994 Wilson 1995) hellip

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is expanding at a rapid rate and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiations (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999) as well as frameworks unique to a specific culture (Fang 1997 Faure 1998 Kumar 1999)

If the author has published two or more works in the same year we distinguish between them by adding the letters a b c etc closed up to the year of publication to indicate the order in which they were published

Such is the scale of improvement within less than a year (Burt 2000a)

If we need to refer to two works by the same author published in the same year

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000a b)

If our source is trustworthy but the authorrsquos name is not known we use the name of the source in the text

More people than ever seem to be using retail home delivery (The Times 1996) in order to unlock greater growth and competitiveness (European Commission 1998) so that local organizations can help new and growing businesses (DTI 2002)

Note that when the name of the source is too long and we use initials in the text then we should not forget to provide the full name at the end of our assignment in the reference list bibliography (eg DTI Department of Trade and Industry) If our source is from the internet we follow the same principle

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 14: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surnamendash year or when the name of the author is not known organisation name of website ndash year The website address should never be placed inside the text For example if the following source comes from a website the reader will see that when he looks at our detailed bibliography at the end of the paper

Between January and July 2000 500000 Focus magazines were sold world-wide and 300000 of the sales were in Europe (Ford 2000)

Now if you refer to a source which is directly quoted in another source you have to cite both in the text

A study by Smith (1960 cited in Jones 1994) showed thathellip

DIRECT QUOTATIONS

When we use the exact words from a source then our quotation is called a direct quotation and we place it within double quotation marks (ldquohelliprdquo) We also mention the page number from which the quotation comes from in a parenthesis (it comes after the year of publication and is separate from it by a comma)

As Harvey (1992 p 21) said ldquogood practices must be taughtrdquo

National culture is ldquoperhaps the broadest social context within which negotiation can occurrdquo (Carnevale 1995 p 310)

If we want to omit material from a direct quotation we use ellipsis (hellip) Make sure that what remains in the sentence makes sense

The literature on cross cultural negotiations is ldquoexpanding hellip and scholars have begun to develop both generic frameworks for explaining the dynamics of cross cultural negotiationsrdquo (Brett 2000 Gelfand and Dyer 2000 George et al 1998 Kumar 1999)

Use direct quotations only when it is absolutely necessary When you have to quote a longer part from your source (more than two-three lines)

it should be indented (15 cm left and right)

we should not use quotation marks

we must single-space the text These types of quotations are called block-quotations and should be used sparingly in our assignments Here is an example

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 15: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

As Sheridan Baker (2004 p 245) notes the importance of a good introduction cannot

be overstressed in essay writing

You can usually blame a bad essay on a bad beginning If your essay falls apart it probably has no primary idea to hold it together Whats the big idea we used to ask The phrase will serve as a reminder that you must find the big idea behind your several smaller thoughts and musings before you start to write

That is why a writer should come up with a solid thesis statement and with the

appropriate ideas to support it

In the next page there is an example of how various citations and quotations should be incorporated in our assignments (adaptation from Campbell amp Finch 2004 p 179)

Organisational justice may be defined as employees perceptions of the fairness with which they have been treated by an organisation or organisations There are a range of theoretical perspectives which examine the concept of organisational justice and the importance of maintaining perceptions of fairness in the workplace Examples include equity theory (Adams 1965) social exchange theory (Homans 1961) relative deprivation theory (Martin 1981) justice motive theory (Lerner 1977) and the justice judgment model (Leventhal 1976) Studies in these areas have shown that perceptions of injustice may not only lead to dissatisfaction but also decreased job performance (Greenberg 1988) poorer quality of work (Cowherd amp Levine 1992) and less co-operation with co-workers (Pfeffer amp Langton 1993) The two fundamental building blocks of organisational justice theory are distributive and procedural justice which are now amongst the most widely researched concepts in this field The primary distinction between these two forms of justice is that the former refers to what the outcomes of organisational decisions are whilst the latter is concerned with how the decisions are made A third dimension of organisational justice interactional justice is concerned with the sensitivity with which information is communicated hellip

Procedural justice on the other hand may be defined as the fairness of methods mechanisms and processes used to determine outcomes (Folger amp Cropanzano 1998) or the perceived fairness of the procedures used in making decisions (Folger amp Greenberg 1985) Lind and Tyler (1988) investigated relational approaches to fairness and argued that norms that develop through identification with groups lead individuals to develop a commitment to social procedures and power relations These in turn are used to make decisions on procedural fairness Fair procedures should be consistent bias-

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 16: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

free accurate have correction mechanisms in the case of mistakes take into account the concerns of all parties and be morally acceptable (Leventhal 1980) Tyler and Bies (1990) identified five factors that influence employeesrsquo perceptions of procedural fairness in organisations

1 adequate consideration of the viewpoints of others 2 consistency in the criteria on which decisions are based 3 bias-free 4 the provision of timely feedback and 5 effective communication of the basis for decisions

A sixth element which may be added to this (although it is perhaps arguable whether it represents an independent criterion) is whether decision makers themselves accept the terms which they are presenting to employees Thibaut and Walker (1975) further subdivided procedural justice into two components namely process control (ldquovoice effectrdquo) and decision control (ldquochoice effectrdquo)

ILLUSTRATIONS (CHARTS GRAPHS TABLES PHOTOGRAPHS etc) When we want to include illustrations in our assignments it is important to remember to cite the source from which they come from We should always number our tables charts and graphs consecutively (table 1 table 2 etc graph 1 graph 2 etc) See below some examples of how we present a table inside the assignment Figure 1 Developing strategy

Source PMSU (2006)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 17: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Table 12 Staff numbers Yearperiod PIU FSU PMSU

At Mar 2004 79

At Feb 2003 90

At Jan 2002 8ft3pt

At Sept 2001 50-60 15 ft

At Jan 2001 17ft 3 pt

End 1999 51

End 1998 36

Source HC Deb (2003-04c) (2002-03b) (2001-02c) (2000-01) We never forget to fully cite the source in the bibliography at the end

The Harvard Referencing System BIBLIOGRAPHY

Our sources appear at the end of our assignment in the form of a list under the title Bibliography or References Works cited and are in an alphabetical order Watch the following The differences in the use of the titles Bibliography and References are the following References Works cited A list of the sources to which you have made a reference in your text the list appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page Bibliography A list of all the sources you have consulted in order to write your assignment whether you mention them in the text or not This list also appears at the end of the assignment on a separate page

Books by one or two authors

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 18: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS and Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Edition (if not the first) Town of publication Publisher

Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Lewis R and Inglis J 1994 How to write reports the key to success London Collins

Books by four or more authors

We write down the names of all the authors contributors in the order in which they appear in the publication

Books edited by one person

Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED

Book edited by two people

Brown S and Glasner A eds 1999 Assessment matters in higher education Buckingham Open University A chapter from an edited book

Contributing authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article In Editorrsquos Surname INITIALS ed eds Title of Book Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which article appears If there are two or more editors then instead of ed use eds

Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356

A translated work

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title Translated from helliplanguage by full name of the translator Town of publication Publisher (year when originally published)

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 19: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Bourdieu P 1977 Outline of a theory of practice Translated from French by Robert Nice Cambridge Cambridge University Press (originally published in 1975)

Journal articles

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) page numbers in which the article appears

Baron R M and Kenny DA 1986 The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51 (2) 1173-82 Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15

Newspaper article

Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of newspaper day and month page numbers and column number Please note that if the article is anonymous we begin the citation with the newspaper title

Smith J 1992 Picking up the bills Independent 4 June 28a Or if anonymous Independent 1992 Picking up the bills 4 June 28a

Lecture Notes

Papas G 2012 Intro in Economics Lecture notes (BA first year)

A government organization publication

Name of issuing body Year of publication Title of publication Town of publication Publisher report number (if available)

Great Britain Department for Transport Local Government and the Regions 2002 Building Regulations 2000 - drainage and waste disposal London Stationery Office UNESCO 1993 General information programme and UNISIST Paris Unesco PGI-93WS22

Conference papers

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 20: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of paper In Surname INITIALS of editor of proceedings ed Title of conference proceedings date place Town of publication Publisher page numbers in which the paper appears

Mackenzie A 2005 Staff information skills strategies to influence up-take In University College amp Research Group North West Information literacy the whole shebang theory strategy application and impact Conference 15th March EdgeHillCollege of Higher Education Ormskirk Liverpool Liverpool Journal of Information Literacy 100-110

Thesis

Authorrsquos surname INITIALS Year of publication submission Title of thesis Designation (type) Name of institution to which it was submitted

Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University

TV programmes

News at Ten 2001 Jan 27 2200 hrs

Electronic material

Here we apply the same guidelines as above (depending on what type of source we retrieved eg an e-book an article or journal from the internet a newspaper article conference proceedings etc) What is different here is that we do not add the place of publication and publishing house information but the web address and the date on which we accessed the source For example if we have to cite an electronic journal we follow the standard format for journals and add at the end Available from URL [date of access] Please note that the ldquodate of accessrdquo is the date on which you retrieved the source from the website See the detailed examples below Authorrsquos Surname INITIALS Year of publication Title of article Title of journal volume number (part issue number- if there is one) Available from URL [Accessed date]

Swaminathan V Lepkoswka-White E and Rao BP 1999 Browsers or buyers in cyberspace An investigation of electronic factors influencing electronic exchange Journal of Computer-Mediated Communication 5 (2) Available from www ascuscorg jcmcvol5 issue2 [Accessed 15 June 2003]

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 21: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

Also note that When giving the URL (internet address) we include http only if the address does not include a www Also when giving the URL of a database then we write the address of the database not the full (long) address of the individual item If we need to take information from an article on the internet whose author is anonymous then our citation on the bibliography page starts with the ldquoname of the sourcerdquo that is with the name of the website from which we retrieved the information The sequence is as follows Name of the website year of creation update of webpage Title of article Available from URL [date of access] Neacutestle 2008 Creating Shared Value Environment Available from wwwnestlecomSharedValueCSREnvironmentIntroductionIntroductionhtm [Accessed 16 August 2008] In the next page there is an example of how a References page Bibliography page should look like Do not forget that a Bibliography References page begins always on a separate page in our assignments

References Abbott A 1988 System of Professions An Essay on the Division of Expert Labor Chicago University of Chicago Press Andresen L ed 1994 Strategies for assessing students Birmingham SCED Apollo Enterprises 1993 Annual Report 8 Bank of England 2003 Quarterly Report on Small Business Statistics London Bank of England Better Business Bureau 2001 Third-party assurance boosts online purchasing Available from httpbbbonlineorgaboutpress2001101701asp [Accessed 7 January 2002] Bourdieu P 1977 The forms of capital In Richardson J G ed Handbook of Theory and Research for the Sociology of Education New York Greenwood Press 311-356 Department for Trade and Industry (DTI) 2002 White Paper on Enterprise Skills and Innovation London DTI Ernst and Ernst 1978 Social Responsibility Disclosure 1978 Survey Cleveland Ernst and Ernst

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage

Page 22: HANDBOOK FOR DISSERTATIONcampusint.unimarconi.it/.../comunicazione/HandbookforDissertation.… · terms of feedback, supervisors may need five to seven days to read a draft of a chapter

Via Plinio 44 - 00193 Roma Tel +39 06 377251 Fax +39 06 37725214

wwwunimarconiit wwwmarconichanneltv wwwmarconistudiosit infounimarconiit

Codice Fiscale e Partita IVA 07154361005

European Commission 1998 Fostering Entrepreneurship in Europe Priorities for the Future Brussels European Commission Guthrie J and Parker L 1997 Editorial celebration reflection and a future a decade of AAAJ Accounting Auditing amp Accountability Journal 10 3-15 Hounsome I W 2001 Factors affecting the design and performance of flexible ducts in trench reinstatements Thesis (Ph D) Napier University Leeds Metropolitan University 2002 Business Start-UpLeeds Met Available from wwwlmuacukcitybus_startuphtm [Accessed 22 March 2002] Marsh D T 2000 Anguished voices impact of mental illness on siblings and children Innovations and research 2 (22) 24-25 Munro F A et al 2000 Counselling a skills approach 3rd ed New Zealand Methuen Publications Silverman DF and Propp K eds 1990 The active interview Beverly Hills Sage